Guardian Technologies Smoke Alarm N7001V2 User Manual

Features Q.E.D. programming for

quick enrollment of devices.

2-Partitioned Security System

VISTA-40

This Control Supports the Ademco

2-Way Voice Interface Module (VIM)

For Audio Alarm Verification (AAV)

Installation Instructions • Installation Instructions • Installation Instructions

N7001–INSTV2 6/97,

Part of N7001V2

downloaded from: http://www.guardianalarms.net

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................. 6

Use Part 1 when installing the hardware components of the installation.

Section 1. GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................................................7

SUMMARY OF SYSTEM FEATURES........................................................................7

INTRODUCTION TO THE PARTITIONED SYSTEM ....................................................9

Section 2. INSTALLING THE CONTROL..........................................................................10

MOUNTING THE CABINET.....................................................................................10

PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS................................................................................11

VOICE INTERFACE MODULE (VIM)........................................................................11

Section 3. POWERING THE SYSTEM...............................................................................12

Primary Power .......................................................................................................12

Back-Up Power......................................................................................................12

Earth Ground Connections.....................................................................................12

Power-Up Procedure.............................................................................................13

Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet.....................................................................13

Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheet ................................................................13

Section 4.

INSTALLING REMOTE KEYPADS..................................................................14

General.................................................................................................................14

Programming The Keypads....................................................................................14

Mounting The Keypads..........................................................................................14

Wiring Keypads .....................................................................................................14

Setting the Keypad Address ..................................................................................15

Powering Additional Keypads.................................................................................15

6139AV 2-Way Voice Keypads...............................................................................16

Voice Interface Module (VIM) Connection................................................................16

Section 5. ZONE CONFIGURATIONS...............................................................................17

BASIC 9 HARD-WIRED ZONES..............................................................................17

General Information................................................................................................17

Zone 1..................................................................................................................17

Compatible Smoke Detectors.................................................................................18

Zones 2Ð8 ............................................................................................................18

Compatible Glass Break Detectors ..........................................................................19

Zone 9..................................................................................................................19

2-WIRE POLLING LOOP EXPANSION (Zones 10 through 64)..................................20

General Information................................................................................................20

Intercom Interference.............................................................................................20

Compatible Polling Loop Devices ...........................................................................21

WIRELESS EXPANSION (Zones 1Ð63) ..................................................................22

General Information................................................................................................22

4281 Series Receiver ............................................................................................23

5881 Series Receiver ............................................................................................23

Transmitters ..........................................................................................................24

Arming/Disarming with RF Keys (5801, etc.) ............................................................25

If Using 5827BD/5800TM Wireless Keypad/Transmitter Module ...............................25

Wireless Zone Types .............................................................................................25

Fault Annunciation.................................................................................................26

Important Battery Notice.........................................................................................26

Compatible 5700 Series Wireless Devices...............................................................26

Compatible 5800 Series Wireless Devices...............................................................27

VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (Connector J7) ....................................................................27

General Information................................................................................................27

Ground Start Module..............................................................................................28

Remote Keyswitch.................................................................................................29

Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring ......................................................30

Using a Trigger To Activate Another ManufacturerÕs AAV Unit (if necessary)...............30

Ð 3 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6. RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES.............................31

General Information................................................................................................31

4204 Relay Module................................................................................................31

4300 Transformer & X-10 Devices...........................................................................31

Section 7. THE 4285 PHONE MODULE...........................................................................32

General Information................................................................................................32

Mounting The Phone Module.................................................................................32

Wiring Connections ...............................................................................................33

Programming The Control For Phone Access..........................................................33

Installation When The Telephone System Includes an Answering Machine................34

Section 8. 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS & AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION (AAV)..........35

General Information................................................................................................35

Using the VIM Module and 6139AV Keypad............................................................35

Setting the DIP Switches on the VIM Module...........................................................35

VIM Module Connections to the Control..................................................................35

6139AV Audio Connections to the VIM Module.......................................................36

Programming Information for the VIM Module.....................................................36

Programming Information For the 6139AV Keypad ............................................37

6139AV Keypad Audio Level Adjustment.........................................................37

Using a Non-Ademco Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit...................................38

Section 9. EXTERNAL SOUNDERS..................................................................................39

Compatible Sounders............................................................................................39

PART 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES .....................................................4 0

Use Part 2 when programming. It provides detailed programming procedures and

descriptions of all data fields. It also provides procedures for using #93 Menu Mode.

Section 1. GENERAL PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES.................................................41

GENERAL INFORMATION .....................................................................................41

User-Friendly Zone, Device & Alpha Programming (#93 Menu Mode)........................41

Communication Default Programming .....................................................................41

Entering The Various Program Modes.....................................................................41

Programming Steps...............................................................................................42

Section 2. ZONE TYPES ....................................................................................................43

Section 3. DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING.........................................................................45

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM-WIDE (GLOBAL) DATA FIELDS......................................45

INDEX TO PROGRAMMING FIELDS........................................................................46

DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................47

Control Options.....................................................................................................47

Downloader Options..............................................................................................49

Dialer Options........................................................................................................49

Wireless Options ...................................................................................................51

Partitioning Options...............................................................................................52

Relay Output Options ............................................................................................52

Real Time Clock Options ........................................................................................52

Event Logging Options..........................................................................................52

PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC DATA FIELDS............................................53

General Procedure ................................................................................................53

Partition-Specific Field Descriptions........................................................................53

Section 4. PROGRAMMING WITH #93 MENU MODE .....................................................55

General Information................................................................................................55

Zone Programming................................................................................................56

Serial Number Enrolling/Deleting............................................................................58

Alpha Programming ...............................................................................................58

Entering Zone Descriptors .....................................................................................59

Adding Custom Words...........................................................................................60

Creating Partition Descriptors .................................................................................61

Creating A Custom Message Display (Installer Message)...........................................61

Alpha Vocabulary...................................................................................................62

Device Programming..............................................................................................63

Ð 4 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VIM Voice Interface Module Prompts.......................................................................64

Relay Programming................................................................................................65

Zone List Programming..........................................................................................68

Programming Relays for Silencing of External Sounders When Using the VIM ...........68

Programming the VIM for Relay Triggering on Supervision Fault................................69

Relay Voice Descriptors .........................................................................................69

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitute Vocabulary ............................70

Custom Word Voice Substitutes.............................................................................70

Section 5. SYSTEM COMMUNICATION............................................................................71

COMMUNICATION FORMATS................................................................................71

Table of Contact ID Event Codes ............................................................................73

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING.......................................................................74

Loading Communication Defaults ...........................................................................74

Making Changes To Communication Fields .............................................................74

Swinger Suppression ............................................................................................74

Enabling Of Dialer Reporting By Partition.................................................................74

Summary Of Default Consequences.......................................................................75

Communication Defaults For Low Speed Format (Q94 then Q80)..............................76

Communication Defaults For Ademco Express Format (Q94 then Q81)......................77

Communication Defaults For Ademco High Speed Format (Q94 then Q82)................78

Communication Defaults For Ademco's Contact ID Format (Q94 then Q83) ................79

Section 6. DOWNLOADING................................................................................................80

REMOTE DOWNLOADING ....................................................................................80

DIRECT WIRE DOWNLOADING..............................................................................82

Section 7. SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK................................................................83

PART 3. SYSTEM OPERATION AND TESTING................................................8 4

Section 1. SYSTEM OPERATION .....................................................................................85

SECURITY ACCESS CODES.................................................................................85

KEYPAD FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................90

General Information................................................................................................90

Phone Module ......................................................................................................90

Arming Functions ..................................................................................................90

Access Control......................................................................................................91

Partition ÒGOTOÓ Commands..................................................................................91

View Capabilities of a User......................................................................................91

Viewing Downloaded Messages.............................................................................91

Using the Built-in UserÕs Manual..............................................................................91

Displaying Descriptors............................................................................................91

Panic Keys............................................................................................................92

End-User Relay Command Mode (#70 Mode)..........................................................92

Trouble Conditions................................................................................................92

Power Failure ........................................................................................................93

VIM VOICE INTERFACE MODULE OPERATOR FUNCTIONS ..................................93

EVENT LOGGING..................................................................................................94

Section 2. TESTING THE SYSTEM...................................................................................96

Using The Test Mode.............................................................................................96

Armed System Test ...............................................................................................96

2-Way Voice Test Mode .........................................................................................97

Turning The System Over To The User...................................................................98

Section 3. SUMMARY OF SYSTEM COMMANDS ...........................................................99

Section 4. REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS.....................................................101

DIP SWITCH TABLES ...................................................................................................103

Section 5. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................106

CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT ..............................................................................107

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM.........................................................................109

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED, MODEL NUMBERS FOR DEVICES ARE ADEMCO MODEL NUMBERS.

Ð 5 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART 1

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Ð 6 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1. GENERAL INFORMATION

SUMMARY OF SYSTEM FEATURES

The VISTA-40 Control is a microprocessor based, programmable, partitioned system, and features EEROM

memory technology (power loss does not result in the loss of programmed data).

Before installing this partitioned system, become completely familiar with the partitioning concepts,

including zone distribution (each zone can be assigned to only one partition), output relay features, user code

usage and authority levels, and the user-friendly menu mode of programming.

NOTE: Throughout this manual, the term "alpha keypad" refers equally to the 6139 alpha keypad or 6139AV

voice/alpha keypad.

The following lists the major features of the VISTA-40 system.

System Features

Zones Supported

Output Control

¥ Supports up to 9 traditional wired zones of protec- ¥ Supports up to 8 output devices (optional 4204

tion.

relays or X-10 devices) that can be activated by

system events. The X-10 devices are not UL Listed

for fire and burglary applications.

¥ Expandable to 64 zones using combinations of

2-wire polling loop devices, and/or 5700 or 5800

series wireless transmitters. Supports 4281 or 5881

(5882 in Canada) series wireless receivers.

¥ Zones can be distributed among 2 logical partitions of

operation.

Addressable Devices

¥ Supports up to sixteen addressable devices (any

combination of remote keypads, RF receivers and

relay output modules ).

¥ Supports up to sixteen 2-wire smoke detectors

(zone 1).

¥ Other zones can be fire zones using 4-wire smoke

and heat detectors and/or polling loop detectors.

¥ Supports up to 50 latching type 2-wire glass break

detectors on zone 8.

Keypads

¥ Supports the following remote keypads: Ademco

6128, 6137, 6139, 6139AV .

For use with the Ademco VIM module.

Keyswitch

¥ Supports the 4146 keyswitch.

Audio Alarm Verification (AAV)

¥ This option allows the central station to "listen-in" at User Codes

the premises during an alarm, when used with the ¥ Supports up to 70 user allocations, maximum of 69 in

optional Ademco 2-Way Voice Interface Module (VIM)

and at least one 6139AV 2-way Voice keypad (up to

six can be used). After an alarm report is successfully

sent to the central station, the local alarm sounder is

automatically silenced and a trigger can be activated

by the central station operator allowing the operator

to hear what is happening at the premises and speak

directly to persons on the premises via the

microphone and speaker built into the 6139AV

keypad.

a given partition, each with various levels of authority.

Keypad Panic Keys

¥ Provides 3 keypad panic functions.

Global Arming

¥ Allows users to easily arm both partitions via keypad

prompts.

Quick Bypass (Forced Bypass)

¥ Quick (forced) bypass feature bypasses all faulted

zones with single key entry sequence.

Phone Access And Voice Response

Memory-Of-Alarm

¥ The VISTA-40 supports the optional 4285 Phone

Module. The 4285 is not permissible in UL

installations. This add-on accessory permits phone

access to the security system for arming/disarming

and for performing most function commands using

the telephone keypad, with voice annunciation being

provided over the phone as confirmation after any

function command entered.

¥ Memory-of-alarm feature, which, upon disarming the

system, automatically displays all zones that were in

an alarm condition while the system was armed.

Circuit Breakers

¥ Self-resetting circuit breaker protection eliminates

the need to replace blown cartridge fuses.

Built-in Users Manual

Note: The phone module can be installed in either

partition, and can be used to control the other

partition using the GOTO command.

¥ Built-in Users Manual (6139, 6139AV only). By

depressing and holding any of the function keys on

the keypad for 5 seconds, a brief explanation of that

function will scroll across the alpha-numeric display.

Ð 7 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Descriptors Voice Substitute Custom Words

¥ All programmed descriptors can be displayed (one at ¥ Provides a means of annunciating substitute words

a time) by pressing and holding the READY key for 5

seconds, then releasing the key. This serves as a

check for installers to be sure all descriptors are

entered properly.

for the phone module whenever a custom word is

used for alpha keypad displays.

Downloading

¥ Direct wire downloading can be done without a

modem, by using a PC or Laptop computer and

4100SM Module.

Event Logging

¥ Event Logging feature keeps record of up to 100

events.

#93 Menu Mode

¥ Easy programming of zones using the user friendly

#93 Menu Mode.

Access Control

¥ Provides user-activated access control command

which pulses a relay output for controlled opening of

access doors (e.g. lobby door).

Communication Features

Communication

¥ Ademco low speed, SESCOA/RADIONICS, Ademco

Express, Ademco High Speed, Ademco Contact ID.

#70 End User Relay Commands

¥ Allows end users to manually turn on/off relay/X-10

module outputs to control lights or other devices via

keypad or phone module.

Comm. Fields

¥ Easy programming for communication fields. Simply

enter the report code for each zone.

Cabinet

¥ Large cabinet with removable door for easier

installations.

Comm. Defaults

¥ Communication defaults can be loaded anytime, and

does not affect non-communication program fields.

Programming Features

¥ Programming can be performed at the office prior to

installation, or on the job site directly from the

keypad.

Zone Reports

¥ All 64 zones can report to a central station using any

standard reporting format.

¥ Can be downloaded from a remote location or at the

job site (using a PC/laptop with 4100SM Serial

Callback

¥ Callback defeat option for downloading.

Module) by using the AdemcoÕs V-Link

downloading software (Rev. 4 or higher) or AdemcoÕs

Real-Time Clock

¥ Real-Time clock for time related functions.

Compass Windows downloading software.

¥ The Control is pre-programmed with a set of standard

values that is designed to meet the needs of many

installations. These values, however, can be

changed to suit the needs of any particular

installation.

NOTE: 6139 or 6139AV alpha keypad must be used

to set clock, or it can be set using Downloader

software.

AC Loss Reporting

¥ Random AC Loss and AC Restore reporting option

sends report randomly from 10-40 minutes after AC

loss, to help prevent central stations from receiving

an overload of reports due to area blackouts.

¥ The Control can also be pre-programmed by the

installer with one of four standard communication

default programming values, thus further saving time

and effort.

Test Reporting

Installer Code

¥ Installer code override feature. Installer code will

disarm system only if it was used to arm the system.

¥ Intelligent test reporting option means test reports

will not be sent if any other report was sent within the

programmed test report interval.

Prohibit Program Mode Entry

¥ If desired, entry to program mode via [*] + [#] within

30 seconds of power up can be disabled.

Split/Dual Reporting

¥ Split/Dual reporting communicator options available.

Cancel Report

¥ Option to allow a cancel report to be sent, even after

Bell Time-out has ended.

Alpha Descriptors

¥ All zones and partitions can be assigned

descriptions.

¥ The letter "s" or " 's " can be added to descriptors.

Voltage Triggers

¥ Used to interface with LORRA or other devices.

Relay Voice Descriptors

¥ PC Downloader can command output voltage

triggers to pulse on for 2 seconds.

¥ Separate vocabulary for annunciating relay output

descriptors when using a phone module to activate

relays.

Phone Numbers

¥ Primary and secondary phone number capability.

Custom Words

¥ Up to 20 custom words can be added to the built-in

vocabulary.

¥ Can program different formats for each phone

number.

Ð 8 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION TO THE PARTITIONED SYSTEM

Basic Partitioning Features

The following lists the partitioning features of the VISTA-40 system.

Simple, Secure, Reliable

restrictions). Enough to handle the largest

commercial jobs

¥ Easy to use and program as the simplest alarm

system.

¥ Integrity of security is not compromised for any users

of the system.

¥ Inherent reliability of the partitioned system is equal

to a stand-alone alarm system if purchased

separately.

¥ Multiple levels of authority per partition (allows key

people in a partition to have complete control and

limit system tampering by others).

Partitions

¥ Any zone can be assigned to any particular partition

(easy to install, allows logical assignment by the

dealer).

Keypads

¥ Flexible number of keypads per partition (up to a total

of 16 in a system (exclusive of other ECP devices

and auxiliary power requirements), any way you want

to assign them.

¥ "GOTO" function provides access to the other

partition (ideal for executive access to factory for

example).

¥ Appropriate sounds and messages to assigned

keypads only (each system appears to be

independent to users).

¥ Ability to inhibit other keypads from accessing your

partition (total security in a strip mall environment).

¥ Intelligent partition/zone menu programming help

(simplifies the programming and reduces errors)

¥ Programmable 4-character partition name displayed

on alpha keypads when needed (no need to

memorize numbers Ð name and number are shown

for you).

User Codes

¥ 70 User Codes assigned virtually anyway you want

them (69 max. in any one partition, otherwise no

Global Partitioning Features and Resources

In any system, certain physical system components and features are shared by all partitions or assigned to a

specific partition. The following elements are shared or assignable to a specific partition:

Shared By All Partitions Assignable To One Partition

Dialer

Alarm Relay/Sounder

Power Supply

Wireless Keypad

Keyswitch Station

4 (using relay outputs)

In addition to the physical devices which are shared, the system shares some software

features on a global basis as well. These include:

Panic Code Reports .......................Common code for any partition

Low Battery Reporting ....................Reports as Partition 1

AC Power Reporting Options ..........Reports as Partition 1

Test Reporting Interval ...................Global for the Panel

Download Phone Number ..............Global for the Panel

Communication Format ...................Global for the Panel

Rotary/Touch Tone ........................Global for the Panel

Download Callback defeat ...............Global for the Panel

Installer Code .................................Global for all Partitions

Partition Specific Features

Many devices and functions are reserved on a partition basis to provide proper operation

and flexibility for installations. The items assignable on a per partition basis include:

¥ Keypads

¥ Entry and Exit Delays

¥ Enable/Disable Chime Mode

¥ "Go To" Partition function

¥ Swinger Suppression

¥ Burglary Alarm Comm. Delay

¥ Open/close for Installer Code

¥ Confirmation of Arming Ding

¥ Alarm Sounder Duration

¥ User Codes

¥ Keypad Sound during Exit Delay

¥ Primary Subscriber Number

¥ Secondary Subscriber Number

¥ Enable/Disable of Panic Keys

¥ Enable/Disable of Duress

¥ Multiple Alarm Reporting

¥ Quick Arm enable/disable

¥ Inhibit Bypass of one Zone

Ð 9 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2. INSTALLING THE CONTROL

MOUNTING THE CABINET

General

The VISTA-40 is supplied with a 12.5"W x 14.5"H x 3"D cabinet suitable for use

in residential and non-certified commercial burglary installations.

Mount the Control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not

supplied) in a clean, dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public.

The back of the Control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

Follow the instructions below for mounting the VISTA-40 PC board into the

cabinet and for mounting the Control's lock to its cabinet door.

Mounting The

PC Board

Before mounting the circuit board, be certain that the appropriate metal

knockouts have been removed. Do not attempt to remove the

knockouts after the circuit board has been installed.

1. Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. Observe proper

clip orientation to avoid damage to the clip when mounting screws are

tightened and to avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board.

2. Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make

certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated in step 2 detail.

3. Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to

the cabinet with the accompanying screws (as illustrated in step 3 detail).

Advisory

Make certain that the mounting screws are reasonably tight to ensure that there is

a good ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress

field wiring away from the microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. The

cabinet provides 2 loops on its left and right sidewalls for anchoring field wiring

using tie wraps. These steps are important to minimizing the risk of panel RF

interference with television reception.

DETAIL SIDE

VIEW OF BOARD

INSERTED INTO

SLOTS

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP AND

BOARD INSTALLED

3RD CLIP

REQUIRED

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP INSTALLATION

A-CABINET TAB WITHOUT CLIP

B-CABINET TAB WITH HANGING CLIP

MOUNTING THE PC BOARD

Installing the Lock

RETAINER CLIP

(NOTE POSITION)

1. Remove the lock knockout on the

control cabinet cover. Insert the key

into the lock. Position the lock in the

hole making certain that the latch will

make contact with the latch bracket

when the door is closed.

LOCKED

RETAINER

SLOTS

RETAINER

CLIP

2. While holding the lock steady, insert

the retainer clip into the retainer

slots.

UNLOCKED

3. Hold the lock steady, and insert the

retainer clip into the retainer slots.

Position the clip as illustrated in

order to permit easy removal.

CABINET DOOR BOTTOM

Ð 10 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS

Standard Phone Line

Connections

IMPORTANT!: If using a 4285 Phone Module, phone connections must be

made exactly as shown in the PHONE MODULE section, even if the system is

not programmed to communicate with a monitoring station. The 4285 Phone

Module will not function unless the system is wired exactly as

described.

Incoming phone line and handset wiring is connected to the main terminal block

as follows (refer to Diagram below):

TB1-26: Local Handset (TIP)

TB1-27: Local Handset (RING)

TB1-28: Incoming Phone Line (TIP)

TB1-29: Incoming Phone Line (RING)

Warning:

To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing

the panel.

If you want to connect the control panel to phone lines that require ground start

capability, you must use a 675 Ground Start Module must be used. This module

is triggered by one of the outputs on the connector labeled J7 (see VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS section).

Voice Interface Module

(VIM)

Be sure to connect the VIM unit to the control's handset terminals 26 and 27.

Refer to the 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS AND AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION

section later in this manual for wiring diagram.

PABX

If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the

PABX has a back-up power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours. Many

PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a PABX will result in a

communication failure if power is lost.

Incoming

Telco Line

Handset

26 27

28 29 3300

28 29

TERMINALS

ON CONTROL

EARTH GROUND

INCOMING TELCO LINE

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

TIP

RJ31X

JACK

PREMISES

PHONES

RING

PLUG

STANDARD PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS

Ð 11 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3. POWERING THE SYSTEM

Primary Power

Power to the Control panel is supplied by model No. 1361* Plug-in Transformer

which is rated at 16.5VAC, 40VA. Caution must be taken when wiring this

transformer to the panel to guard against blowing the fuse inside the transformer

(non-replaceable).

* NOTE: Use 1361CN Transformer in Canadian installations.

Back-Up Power

In the event of an AC power loss, the Control panel is supported by a back-up,

rechargeable gel cell battery. Ademco 467 (12V, 4AH), YUASA NP4-12 (12V,

4AH) and NP7-12 (12V, 7AH) batteries are recommended. Do not use Gates

batteries.

The standby battery is automatically tested every 24 hours, beginning 24 hours

after exiting programming mode. In addition, entry into the test mode will cause a

battery test to be initiated.

Battery Standby Table

N O T E : These figures are

AUX. STANDBY CURRENT DRAW

AMP-HRS. 200mA 400mA 600mA 750mA

approximate, and may vary

depending upon the age, quality,

and capacity of the battery at

the time of the AC loss.

4.0

6.0-7.0

6 hrs. 4 hrs. 3 hrs. 2.5 hrs.

11 hrs. 7 hrs. 5.5 hrs. 4 hrs.

Earth Ground

Connections

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be

effective, the designated earth ground terminal must be terminated in a good

earth ground. The following are examples of good earth grounds available at most

installations:

Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is

recommended) firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is electrically

connected and secured.

AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong, 120VAC, power outlets

only. To test the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester

with neon lamp indicators, such as the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or

equivalent, available at most electrical supply stores.

BATTERY

TABS

PRIMARY POWER

Supplied by 1361*

Plug-in

Transformer which

is rated at

Connect to

12VDC, 4AH

or 12VDC, 7AH

GEL CELL

BATTERY

16.5VAC, 40VA.

Caution must be

taken when wiring

this transformer to

the panel to guard

against blowing the

fuse inside the

transformer (non-

replaceable).

CHARGING

VOLTAGE

13.7 VDC

Connect to

24hr. 120VAC,

60 Hz Outlet

Replace

every

3 years

TRANSFORMER

16.5VAC, 40VA

ADEMCO No.1361

(IN CANADA

USE No. 1361CN)

or 4300 IF

X-10 DEVICES

WILL BE USED

NOTE:

WHEN POWERING UP

THE PANEL, PLUG THE

TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE

CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

AC POWER AND BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Ð 12 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power-Up Procedure

1. Fill out the Polling Loop Current Draw and Auxiliary Device Current Draw

Worksheets shown below. Make sure that the currents drawn from these

outputs do not exceed their respective ratings.

CAUTION: Failure to observe the polling loop current rating will cause a

polling loop malfunction. Failure to observe the auxiliary output current rating

will result in a battery which does not charge properly, or possibly a tripped

circuit breaker.

2. Wire the 1361 transformer (1361CN in Canada) to terminals 1 & 2 on the

control panel (before connecting the battery), as shown in the SUMMARY OF

CONNECTIONS diagram. Do not plug in at this time.

3. Connect all polling loop and auxiliary devices, such as keypads, PIRs, etc.

4. Plug the transformer into a 24-hour, uninterrupted AC outlet. After a few

seconds, the green READY LED on the keypad(s) should light and the

keypad(s) should display DISARMED READY TO ARM (Alpha keypads), or

READY (Fixed-word keypads).

5. Connect the battery to the battery tabs on the control board using the battery

cables supplied (use Red for + to +, Black for Ð to Ð). See the SUMMARY OF

CONNECTIONS diagram.

POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET

RPM DEVICE

998MX PIR

4191SN Contact

4194 Contact

CURRENT

1mA

# UNITS

TOTAL CURRENT

1 mA

4192SD Photo Smoke

4192SDT Smoke w/Heat

4192CP Ionization Detector

4275 Dual Element PIR

4278 Quad Element PIR

4190WH 2-Zone RPM

0.4 mA

1 mA

1 mA (LOW)

2 mA (HIGH)

16 mA

1mA

4208 8-Zone RPM

4278EX-SN PIR

4939SN Contact

4959SN Contact

TOTAL CURRENT *

* If the total current draw exceeds 64 mA, a 4197 Loop Extender module must be used.

AUXILIARY DEVICE CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET

# UNITS

DEVICE

6128 Keypad

6137 Keypad

6139 Keypad

CURRENT

30mA

85mA

TOTAL CURRENT

100mA

200mA

6139AV Keypad

675 Ground Start Module

Built-in Polling Loop

4281 RF Receiver

5881 RF Receiver

4197 Poll Loop Extender

4204 Relay Module

50 mA

(total poll loop worksht)

35mA

60mA

80 mA

15mA standby

40mA per active relay

VIM Voice Interface Module.

80mA

TOTAL CURRENT (750mA max)

If using hard-wire devices such as PIRs, refer to the specifications for that particular unit's current draw.

Only applies if powered from Control's auxiliary power.

Ð 13 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4. INSTALLING REMOTE KEYPADS

General

The Control supplies up to 750 mA of auxiliary power for remote keypads, polling loop

devices and/or other auxiliary devices such as motion detectors or 4-wire smoke

detectors*.

The Control supports, independent of auxiliary power considerations, up to 16

addressable remote keypads (6128, 6137, 6139, 6139AV ). Note that since the

maximum number of addressable devices connected to the keypad lines is 16, usage of

non-keypad devices (ex. 4204, 4281, 5881) reduces the number of keypads that can be

supported.

Keypads can be powered from the auxiliary power output provided that the total current

drawn from this output does not exceed 750 mA. Keep this in mind when adding remote

keypads so you don't overdraw current from the panel. This would result in a battery which

does not charge properly or possibly a tripped auxiliary solid state circuit breaker.

If the auxiliary load is determined to be greater than 750 mA, then additional keypads can

be powered from a separate power supply. Refer to the ÒPowering Additional KeypadsÓ

paragraph for a diagram that shows how to make connections to the separate power

supply.

* 4-wire smoke detectors cannot be used in UL Listed applications.

The control supports the VIM Voice Interface Module (connected to the control's keypad

terminals), which supports up to six 6139AV 2-way voice keypads per system. Refer to the

6139AV KEYPAD paragraph later in this section.

Programming The

Keypads

The keypads can be set for a device address of 00Ð15

IMPORTANT! You must select a device address of 00, 01, 02, or 03 if standard

defaults are to be programmed, since these are the only keypad addresses enabled by

the standard default. Instructions for setting a keypad address are provided with each

keypad, and in the ÒSetting the Keypad AddressÓ paragraph on the next page.

Keypads must also be programmed for type, partition number and keypad sounder

suppression options. In addition, 6139AV 2-way voice keypads require the programming

of a VIM keypad number, which refers to the keypad's ID number when controlled by a

central station operator during a 2-way voice session.

For instructions, refer to Section 4: #93 MENU MODEÐDEVICE PROGRAMMING in

PART 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES.

Mounting The

Keypads

Note that field wiring to the keypads must be completed before the keypads can be

mounted.

The keypads can be either surface mounted directly to a drywall, or to a single or double

gang electrical box, or flush mounted (using Trim Ring Kit 5137TRK or 6139TRK). Refer

to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and/or trim ring kit for

specific information.

Be sure to take the height of the users into account when mounting keypads.

Wiring Keypads

Connect keypads to the control's keypad terminals 6Ð9 as shown below and in the

Summary Of Connections diagram at the end of this manual.

KEYPAD CONNECTOR CABLE

RED

BLACK

6128, 6137, 6139

KEYPADS

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

KEYPAD CONNECTIONS

Keypads may be wired to a single wire run or individual keypads may be connected to

separate wire runs. The maximum wire run length from the panel to a keypad which is

homerun back to the panel must not exceed the following:

Ð 14 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE: The length of all wire runs combined

must not exceed 2000 feet when

unshielded quad conductor cable is used

(1000 feet if shielded cable is used.)

If more than one keypad is wired to a run,

then the above maximum lengths must be

divided by the number of keypads on the

run (i.e. the maximum length would be 225

feet if two keypads are wired on a #22

gauge run).

Wire Gauge Maximum Length

#22 gauge

#20 gauge

#18 gauge

#16 gauge

450 feet

700 feet

1100 feet

1750 feet

Setting the

Keypad Address

To set the keypad's address, do the following:

1. Enter the address mode: Power-up (plug-in) the keypad. Within 60 seconds of

system power-up, press and hold down the [1] and [3] keys at the same time for 3

seconds. (If unable to enter address mode, power-up and try again.)

The current keypad address will be displayed, and the cursor will be under the "tens"

digit. If 10 seconds have passed with no key entry, the keypad automatically exits

address mode. You must then power down, power-up and start address mode again.

Note: The keypad will not enter address mode if the panel to which it is connected

is in programming mode.

2. Set the current address to "00": Press [0] to clear the current "tens" digit. The

cursor will move to the "ones" digit position. Press [0] to clear the current "ones" digit.

The cursor will move back to the "tens" digit position.

3. Enter the keypad's address: Enter the proper "tens" digit of the keypad's

address. The cursor will move to the "ones" digit position. Enter the proper "ones"

digit of the keypad's address.

Note that address "31" sets the keypad to the non-addressable mode.

4. Exit the address mode:

Press [*] to save the displayed address and exit address mode.

Note: If 10 seconds passes with no key entry, the keypad automatically exits

address mode.

Viewing the Keypad Address

Press and hold down the [1] and [3] keys at the same time for about 3 seconds. The

current address will be displayed. No key entry is allowed in this mode. Press any key to

exit or wait 10 seconds to exit the viewing mode.

Powering Additional

Keypads

Up to five (5) 6139 keypads can be powered from the auxiliary power output provided

that the 750mA rating is not exceeded. The backup battery will supply power to these

keypads in the event that AC power is lost.

Additional keypads, up to the system maximum of 16, can be connected to the

system by using a regulated, 12VDC power supply (e.g., 488-12 supplies 12V,

500mA). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed supply for UL installations.

Connect additional keypads as shown below, using the keypad wire colors shown.

Make sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used.

SUPPLEMENTARY

POWER SUPPLY

CONTROL

TERMINAL STRIP

–

AUX AUX

DATA DATA

–

OUT

IMPORTANT:

IMPORTANT

MAKE CONNECTIONS

DIRECTLY TO SCREW

TERMINALS AS SHOWN.

Common (Ð) of auxiliary

power supply must be

connected to (Ð) terminal

7 of the control panel.

MAKE NO CONNECTION

TO THE KEYPAD BLUE

WIRE (IF PRESENT).

POWERING ADDITIONAL KEYPADS

Ð 15 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6139AV 2-Way Voice

Keypads

The control supports the VIM Voice Interface Module, which can support up to six

6139AV 2-way voice keypads. These keypads feature a built-in microphone and

speaker that allows a central station operator to "listen-in" and/or speak to persons at

the protected premises after an alarm has occurred. Note that during this Òlisten-inÓ

and/or ÒspeakÓ period, all alarms will be temporarily silenced. Refer to the 2-WAY

VOICE KEYPADS AND AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION section later in this manual for

details on wiring and using the VIM module and 6139AV keypads.

6139AV Audio Connection

In addition to the 4-wire connection to the control's keypad terminals, the 6139AV

requires a shielded 2-wire connection to a VIM Voice Interface Module. This

information is provided in the 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS AND AUDIO ALARM

VERIFICATION section.

Voice Interface Module

(VIM) Connection

The VIM connects to the control's keypad terminals in the same manner as any other

keypad. The VIM requires a device address to be set using its DIP switches, and

requires programming using the #93 Menu ModeÐDevice Programming. Refer to

the 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS AND AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION section for

connection and programming information.

Ð 16 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5. ZONE CONFIGURATIONS

BASIC 9 HARD-WIRED ZONES

General Information

Zones 1-9 are reserved for traditional hard-wired devices. The following table summarizes

zone usage.

Zone 1

EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsupervised devices. Also

supports up to sixteen (16) 2-wire smoke detectors.

Zones 2, 3, 4, 6

Zone 5

EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsupervised devices. Also

supports 4-wire smoke detectors.

EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsupervised devices. Also

supports 4-wire smoke detectors.

Zone 7

EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsupervised devices. Also

supports 4-wire smoke detectors. Alternatively, can be used to

support remote keyswitch. If used for keyswitch, it cannot be used

as protection zone.

Zone 8

Zone 9

EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsupervised devices. Also

supports 4-wire smoke detectors. Zone 8 also supports latching

glass break detectors.

Unsupervised devices only. Programmable for fast response

(10mS). Can monitor fast acting glass break detectors or vibration

sensors if set for fast response.

Programmable Response Time For Zone 9:

Zone response time for zone 9 can be set to either 350mS (normal) or 10mS (fast) via

program field *14.

Hard-wired Zone 1

UL NOTE: EOLRs are required for UL installations.

Applications Can be used for EOLR supervised or closed circuit

unsupervised devices. It is the only zone that supports up to

sixteen (16) 2-wire smoke detectors.

Zone Response Type Any, except type 23 (no alarm)

Max. Zone Resistance 100 ohms, excluding EOLR

Unsupervised Usage ¥ Cut red PCB jumper.

¥ Only closed circuit devices can be used.

EOLR Supervised

¥ Leave red PCB jumper intact.

¥ Supports both open circuit and closed circuit devices.

¥ Connect open circuit device in parallel across the loop. The

2,000 ohm EOLR must be connected across the loop wires

at the last device.

¥ Connect closed circuit device in series with the loop.

EOLR Fire Zone:

¥ Leave red PCB jumper intact.

¥ Assign zone type 09 (fire)

¥ Supports up to sixteen (16) 2-wire smoke detectors.

¥ Second CODE + OFF sequence momentarily interrupts

power to reset the smoke detectors.

¥ See table that follows for compatible detectors.

Ð 17 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatible

Smoke Detectors

Device Model #

(System Sensor)

Photoelectric

2100

Photoelectric w/ 135° heat

2100T

2300T

2400

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire

Photoelectric, direct wire

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire

Photoelectric w/B401B base

Photoelectric w/heat sensor & B401B base

Ionization

2400TH

2451

2451TH

1100

Ionization, direct wire

1400

Ionization w/B401B base

1451

Photoelectric duct detector w/DH400 base

Ionization duct detect. w/DH400 base

2451

1451DH

Zone 1 Advisories

If the EOLR is not at the end of the loop, the zone is not properly supervised. The system

may not respond to an open circuit within the zone.

The alarm current provided by this zone is sufficient to support operation of only one

detector in the alarmed state.

Hard-wired Zones 2Ð8

Applications

Can be used for EOLR supervised or closed circuit unsuper-

vised devices. EOLRs are required for UL installations. Can also

support 4-wire smoke detectors. Zone 8 can support latching

glass break detectors.

Zone Response Type Any, except types 20Ð22 (these are used only for 5800 series

wireless transmitters).

Max. Zone Resistance ¥ Zones 2Ð7: 300 ohms, excluding EOLR

¥ Zone 1, 8: 100 ohms, excluding EOLR

Unsupervised Usage ¥ EOLR disabled in field *41 (enter 1).

¥ Only closed circuit devices can be used.

EOLR Supervised

¥ EOLR enabled in field *41 (enter 0).

¥ Supports both open circuit and closed circuit devices.

¥ Connect open circuit devices in parallel across the loop. The

2,000 ohm EOLR must be connected across the loop wires

at the last device.

¥ Connect closed circuit devices in series with the loop.

Glass Break Devices

on Zone 8

¥ Supports up to 50 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.

¥ Configure as EOLR zone.

¥ Second CODE + OFF sequence momentarily interrupts

power to reset the glass break detectors.

¥ See table that follows for compatible detectors.

Smoke Detectors

on Zones 2Ð8

¥ Supports as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered

(see UL note on next page).

¥ Assign zone response type 09 (fire).

¥ The zones must be configured for EOLR supervision.

¥ A normally-closed, momentary switch must be installed in

series with the power to the detectors in order to allow reset of

the smoke detectors after an alarm.

¥ The detectors must be wired in parallel, with the EOLR at the

last detector for full supervision.

¥ To supervise power, a System Sensor No. A77-716 EOL

Relay Module is recommended.

Ð 18 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatible Glass Break Detectors

Use detectors which are compatible with the following ratings:

Standby Voltage:..........5VDC-Ð13.8VDC

Standby Resistance:

Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent resistance of all detectors

in parallel)

Alarm Resistance:.........Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current: ..............2 mA -Ð10 mA

Reset Time:..................Less than 6 seconds

The IEI 735L series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these

ratings. Up to 50 IEI 735L detectors, connected in parallel, may be used (the alarm

current provided by this zone is sufficient to support operation of only one detector in

alarmed state). Follow the manufacturer's recommendations on proper installation.

Detectors which exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, but maintain a voltage drop in alarm of less

than 3.8 volts can also be used.

Zones 2-8 Advisories

If latching type devices are installed on both zones 1 & 8, and these zones are assigned

to different partitions, there is a possibility that, if both devices go into alarm at the same

time, the resetting of one device could cause the loss of alarm memory in the other

device.

Use of N.O. or N.C. contacts on the same zone may prevent proper glass break detector

operation.

UL NOTE: 4-wire smoke detectors cannot be used in UL installations.

Hard-wired Zone 9

Applications

This zone is unsupervised and is suitable for monitoring fast-

acting glass break sensors or vibration sensors when pro-

grammed for fast response.

Response Type

Response Time

Any type except fire (09), and types 20Ð22 (these are used

only for 5800 series wireless transmitters).

Fast (10 msec) or slow (350 msec) response selected in field

*14.

Max. Zone Resistance 300 ohms

Unsupervised Usage ¥ Only closed circuit devices can be used.

¥ Connect these devices in series with one another between

terminals 22 & 23.

Zone 9 Advisories

Avoid using mechanical magnetic or relay type contacts in this zone when programmed

for fast response.

UL NOTE: The interconnecting wires from zone 9 shall be no longer than 3 feet, with no

intervening walls or barriers for UL installations.

Ð 19 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-WIRE POLLING LOOP EXPANSION (Zones 10 through 64)

General Information

The following table summarizes polling loop expansion characteristics.

Applications

¥ Built-in 2- wire polling loop interface allows the number of

zones to be expanded from the basic 9 zones to up to 64

zones using various Remote Point Modules (RPMs). See

ADVISORIES below.

¥ The polling loop provides power to sensors and serves as

communication path between the panel and sensors.

¥ Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this

section.

RPM Address (ID)

¥ Each sensor must be assigned a unique address ID number

(from 10-64) before being connected to the polling loop. Care

must be taken to assign unique ID numbers to each sensor in

order to allow the panel to supervise and provide keypad

status indications for individual sensors.

¥ Most RPMs have DIP switches to set their addresses. The

4139SN, 4191SN, 4939SN, 4959SN and 998MX have

preprogrammed serial numbers which must be "enrolled" by

the control via the #93 menu programming mode.

Connections

¥ Connect RPM sensors to terminals 24 & 25.

¥ Sensors can be connected to a single run, or groups of

sensors may be connected to separate wire runs, star

configuration, without affecting the panel's ability to supervise

individual sensors.

¥ Follow the wiring instructions provided with individual

sensors. Be sure to observe sensor polarity when wiring.

¥ The maximum allowable wire run length between the panel

and the last sensor on a given wire run is shown in the table

below.

Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

Wire Gauge

Max. Length

650 feet

#22 gauge

#20 gauge

#18 gauge

#16 gauge

Note: Twisted pair recommended

for all normal wire runs.

950 feet

1500 feet

2400 feet

Important: When in a star configuration, no individual run can be longer than the table

indicates, and the total length of all the sensor star runs, combined, cannot exceed 4000'.

If using shielded wire, the maximum is 2000'. If longer wire runs are needed, a 4197/4297

Loop Extender Module must be used (see instructions included with the 4197/4297).

Intercom Interference

If an intercom system is being used, the polling loop wires must be as far from the

intercom wiring as possible (minimum 6"). If this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded

wire must be used. If this is not done, interference on the intercom system might occur.

Also note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is

used.

NOTE: Shield must be terminated at control terminal 30.

Advisories

The maximum allowable current draw from the polling loop is 64mA. Refer to the POLLING

LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET (found in the POWERING THE SYSTEM section

of this manual) for current draws of various polling loop devices.

Make certain to include the total current drawn on the polling loop in the AUXILIARY

CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET (see POWERING THE SYSTEM section) when figuring

the total auxiliary load on the panel's power supply.

Ð 20 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important!

Fault Annunciation

Since the phone module, RF receiver(s), VIM and the polling loop are shared

among the 2 partitions, the scheme for annunciating their failure follows:

Respective faults (for zones 87, 88Ð91, 93 & 97) will report as trouble conditions

only, and as such, should be assigned either zone type 00 if no annunciation is

desired, or zone type 05 if annunciation as trouble condition is desired. If the

polling loop or RF link fails supervision, the corresponding zone number will

display a trouble condition for each partition that uses the device that failed. In

addition, all zones associated with that device will indicate a check condition. The

trouble condition will not interfere with the ability to arm the partition, but the faults

must first be bypassed.

Compatible Polling Loop

Devices

4208

Eight Zone Polling Loop Expansion Module

Does not support 2-wire smoke detectors.

Set DIP switches to identify 8 zones.

4190WH

Two Zone Remote Point Module

The left zone can be EOLR supervised, if necessary, and can

accept either open or closed circuit sensors, and can be set for

fast response. The right zone is unsupervised and can accept

closed circuit sensors only.

4278

Quad Element Polling Loop PIR

DIP switch programmable and connects directly to the polling

loop. Features an auxiliary sensor loop that permits connection of

another nearby closed circuit alarm sensor (reed contact, etc.).

4275

4194

Dual Element Polling Loop PIR

DIP switch programmable.

Surface Mounted Reed Contact (Wide Gap)

DIP switch programmable.

4197/4297 Polling Loop Extender Module

By installing a 4297 at the end of the first loop, the polling loop

can be continued. If more than 64mA needs to be drawn from the

polling loop to power RPMs, use of the 4197/4297 provides

another loop with 64mA available. See instructions accompany-

ing unit.

4192SD

4192SDT

4192CP

4139SN

Photoelectric Smoke Detector

DIP switch programmable.

Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector

DIP switch programmable.

Ionization Smoke Detector

DIP switch programmable.

Auto Smart Surface Mount Reed Contact

Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.

Check product availability.

4191SN

4939SN

4959SN

998MX

Auto Smart Recessed Reed Contact

Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.

Check product availability.

Auto Smart Surface Mount Contact

Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.

Check product availability.

Auto Smart Overhead Door Contact

Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.

Check product availability.

Polling Loop PIR

Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.

Ð 21 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WIRELESS EXPANSION (Zones 1Ð63)

General Information

4281 Series 5700 Series

Receivers

5881 Series 5800 Series

Receivers

Transmitters

Supported By

Various

Transmitters

4281H

63 + 1 RF keypad 5881H

63 + 1 RF keypad

4281M

5881M

5881L

Receivers

4281L

The following table summarizes wireless expansion characteristics.

Zones Supported

¥ The system supports up to 63 wireless transmitters (5700 or

5800 series), plus a wireless keypad (5827/5827BD).

¥ To expand the system using wireless, one or two of the same

type of RF Receivers can be used.

¥ Any zone from 1-63 can be used as a wireless zone. The total

number of transmitters supported by each receiver is shown in

the table above.

RF Receivers

(General)

¥ Supports the 4281 and 5881 series RF receivers.

¥ The receivers respond to status and alarm signals from wireless

transmitters (@345MHz USA; 315MHz Canada 5700 series,

345MHz 5800 series using 5882 receiver) within a nominal

range of 200 feet, and relay this information to the control.

¥ Two of the same type of receivers can provide either a greater

area of coverage, or to provide redundant protection. The type

of receiver used is identified in program field 1*32.

Important: If using two receivers, one of them must be

disconnected while enrolling 5800 series transmitter serial

numbers. You will not be able to enroll serial numbers if both are

connected during the serial number enrolling procedure.

¥ Receivers must be mounted externally to the control a minimum

of 10' away from the control and from other receivers.

¥ The 4281/5881 receivers connect to the keypad data lines.

Receiver Supervision ¥ If the connection is broken between the receiver and the control

panel, a TROUBLE will be displayed for zones 89 or 91 (if type

05 is assigned). In addition, all zones associated with the

receiver will report a trouble condition.

¥ If, within a programmed interval of time, the receiver does not

hear from any of its transmitters, a TROUBLE will appear for

zones 88 or 90 (if type 05 is assigned).

House Identification ¥ 5700 series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the

same house ID (01-31). This prevents system interference from

transmitters in other nearby systems. 5800 series receivers

require house ID only when using a wireless keypad.

¥ Use Sniffer Mode (described later) to make sure you do not

choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system.

¥ 4281/5881 (for 5827) house ID is programmed via #93 Menu

Mode, Device Programming.

Sniffer Mode For

House ID

(Code + [#] + [2])

¥ To check for house IDs being used in nearby systems, enter

your "Installer Code" + [#] + [2]. Remove the batteries from

transmitters installed in this system to avoid receiving their

house IDs.

¥ The receiver will now "sniff" out any House IDs in the area and

display them. Keeping the receiver in this mode for about 2

hours will give a good indication of the house IDs being used.

To exit the Sniffer Mode, simply key your installer code + OFF,

then set your house ID to one not displayed in the "Sniffer

Mode".

¥ Important: Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables RF point

reception, Sniffer Mode cannot be entered while any partition

is armed.

Ð 22 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following table highlights the features of each receiver.

Feature

Wiring

4281 series

5881 series

Connects to keypad lines Connects to keypad lines

House ID

Programmed via #93

Menu Mode.

Programmed via #93

Menu Mode (needed only

if RF keypad used).

Receiver Address

Set via DIP switches.

Enabled via #93 Device

Programming.

Set via DIP switches.

Enabled via #93 Device

Programming.

Cover Removal

Go/No Go Mode

Does not cause alarm or

trouble.

Does not cause alarm or

trouble.

Automatic upon entering

test mode (code + [5]).

Automatic upon entering

test mode (code + [5]).

Spatial Diversity

(2 antennas)

Yes. Eliminates nulls and

voids.

2nd receiver expands

Yes. Eliminates nulls and

voids.

2nd receiver expands

coverage area or provides coverage area or provides

additional redundancy.

Transmitter ID

Set via DIP switches.

Serial numbers are

"enrolled" by the system

or downloaded.

4281 Series Receiver

¥ Set field 1*32 to 1.

¥ Using #93 Menu modeÐDevice Programming, select as RF device type (type 3).

¥ Set house ID via #93 Menu Mode.

¥ Set receiver's device address (01-07 only) using its DIP switches. Lower

numbered address is primary receiver (supervisory fault ID 90, 91). Higher

numbered address is secondary receiver (receiver fault ID 88, 89).

¥ Important: 4281 microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx, where x

is any number. The microprocessor is located just above the DIP switch on the

PC board.

5881 Series Receiver

¥ Set field 1*32 to Ò2Ó.

¥ Using #93 Menu ModeÐDevice Programming, select as RF device type (type 3).

¥ Set house ID via #93 Menu Mode (needed for 5827 keypad only).

¥ Set receiver's device address (01-07 only) using its DIP switches. Lower

numbered address is primary receiver (supervisory fault ID 90, 91). Higher

numbered address is secondary receiver (receiver fault ID 88, 89).

Ð 23 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transmitters

The following table summarizes wireless transmitter characteristics.

Transmitters

(General)

¥ Supports 5700 or 5800 series transmitters.

¥ Each transmitter has a unique transmitter ID number

(Zone #). 5700 series transmitters use DIP switches to

set the ID. 5800 series transmitters must have their ID

numbers "enrolled" by the system or downloaded.

¥ 5700 series transmitters and the 5827 keypad must also

be set for a house ID. Other 5800 series transmitters

have built-in serial numbers and do not require a house

ID to be set. After installation, check that all transmitters

have been assigned the proper house ID by using the

procedure described later.

NOTE: After replacing a low or

dead battery, activate the

transmitter and enter the

security code + OFF to clear its

memory of the "Low Battery"

signal.

Trans. Supervision

¥ Each transmitter (except 5701, 5727, 5801, 5802,

5802CP, & 5804) is supervised by a check-in signal that

is sent to the receiver at 70-90 minute intervals. If at least

one Check-in is not received from a transmitter within a

programmed interval (field 1*31), the keypad will display

the transmitter number and "CHECK" will be displayed.

¥ Each transmitter (including 5701; 5727, 5801, 5802, &

5802CP) is also supervised for low battery conditions,

and transmits a low battery signal when the battery has

approximately 30 days of life remaining. The keypad

displays the transmitter number and "LO BAT".

5800 Series "Enroll" ¥ 5800 series transmitters have built-in serial numbers that

must be "enrolled" by the system during on-site

programming. Refer to PART 2. PROGRAMMING

PROCEDURES section for details.

Checking Trans.

¥ To check that all transmitters have been set properly,

program the receiver to the proper house ID, if required,

and enter the Installer code + [#] + [3].

¥ All transmitters that have been enabled for the partition in

which the test was initiated will be displayed. As each

transmitter checks in (up to 2 hours), its ID number will

disappear. A faster way to do this is to fault each

transmitter, which causes a transmission to be sent to the

receiver. When all transmitters have checked in, there

should be no ID numbers displayed.

Operation including

DIP & serial number

(Code + [#] + [3])

¥ Repeat check for each partition using RF transmitters.

"Go/No Go" Test

Mode (Patented)

¥ This mode helps determine the best location for each

transmitter and is activated by putting the control panel in

the TEST mode.

¥ The receiver's sensitivity is reduced by half. Once

transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the

approximate length of wire to be run to sensors is

connected to the transmitter's screw terminals, fault each

transmitter. Do not conduct this test with your hand

wrapped around the transmitter.

¥ If a single receiver is used, the keypad will beep three

times to indicate signal reception. If two receivers are

used, the keypad will beep once if the first receiver

received the signal, twice if the second receiver received

the signal and three times if both receivers heard the

signal (which is desirable for redundant configurations).

¥ If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move the

transmitter to another location. Usually a few inches in

either direction is all that is required.

¥ To exit this mode, enter the installer code and press

OFF. Note that the Receiver's sensitivity is fully restored

when this mode is exited.

Ð 24 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Arming/Disarming

With RF Keys

(5801, 5802, etc.)

5800 series RF keys can be used to arm and disarm the system. These

transmitters include the 5801, 5802, 5804 and any other 5800 series transmitter

(except 5827 wireless keypad) if programmed for one of zone type responses

20-22. These transmitters are tied to a user in order to provide a record of who

armed or disarmed the system. Because of this, an RF button will not arm or

disarm a system unless it has been assigned to a user, which is done during the

"add a user" function (see ÒAdd A User CodeÓ section). In addition, when the

user is deleted from the system, the key is de-activated. To test whether the keys

are assigned to zones or not, use the test mode. When the appropriate button is

pressed, the corresponding zone will be displayed on the keypad and will remain

there until test mode is terminated.

If Using a 5827BD/5800TM

Wireless Keypad and

Transmitter Module

The 5827BD wireless keypad is a 2-way keypad that receives system status via

the 5800TM transmitter module. The 5800TM module is an addressable device

that connects to the controls keypad terminals. To set the 5800TM's address,

one of its jumpers must be cut as follows:

¥ If keypad is used in partition 1 (field 1*48 = 1), cut the red (W1) jumper.

¥ If keypad is used in partition 2 (field 1*48 = 2), cut the white (W2) jumper.

NOTE: The 5800TM transmitter module does not need to be programmed via

#93 Menu ModeÐDevice Programming.

Wireless Zone Types

Each RF zone, 5700 series or 5800 series, can be programmed to respond as

burglary or fire zone types such as ENTRY/EXIT, INTERIOR, PERIMETER, etc.

(see the ZONE TYPES DEFINITIONS section in the separate PROGRAMMING

GUIDE for a complete explanation of each zone type). 5700 series devices

should be assigned response types as follows:

5700 Series Transmitter Zone Types

ZONE TYPE

Entry/Exit Burg

Perimeter Burg

Interior Burg

TRANSMITTER ID # (zone number)

1 through 47 *

32 through 47 * (5775)

Fire

48 through 63 *

48 through 55 ** (5706)

24 Hour Panic

(silent or audible)

48 through 63*

62 or 63 *** (5701)

Day/Night Burglary

24 Hour Auxiliary

1 through 47 *

NOTES:

Note that zones 1Ð63 can be used, but have the following limitations: Transmitters

set for zones 48Ð55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while the zone is faulted.

Transmitters set for zones 56Ð63 will transmit once every 3 seconds while faulted.

These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely affect transmitter battery life.

Transmitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3 minute lock-out between

transmissions. Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors protecting

frequently used doors or windows to conserve battery life.

Transmitter IDs 48 through 55 have highest signal priority.

Transmitter IDs 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off premises

Ñsignal priority is lower than that of fire, but higher than burglary.

***

Advisories

1. Do not place transmitters on or near metal objects. This will decrease range

and/or block transmissions.

2. Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not

place receiver on or near metal objects.

3. For maximum range, the RF receiver must be at least 10 feet from the Control

panel or any remote keypads to avoid interference from their microprocessor.

4. If dual receivers are used:

A. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other, as well as from the Control

panel and remote keypads.

B. Device addresses must be different.

C. Using two Receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the

system can support (63 transmitters, plus a wireless keypad), but will

increase remote transmission range.

Ð 25 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fault Annunciation

Since the phone module, RF receiver(s), VIM and the polling loop are shared

among the 2 partitions, the scheme for annunciating their failure follows:

Respective faults (for zones 87, 88Ð91, 93 & 97) will report as trouble conditions

only, and as such, should be assigned either zone type 00 if no annunciation is

desired, or zone type 05 if annunciation as trouble condition is desired. If the

polling loop or RF link fails, the corresponding zone number will display a trouble

condition for each partition that uses the device that failed. In addition, all zones

associated with that device will indicate a check condition. The trouble condition

will not interfere with the ability to arm the partition, but the faults must first be

bypassed.

NOTE: 5800 series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will

annunciate a "CHECK" condition if cover is removed unless field *24 is disabled.

Important Battery Notice

The wireless transmitters are designed to provide long battery life under normal

operating conditions. Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4Ð7 years

depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being

used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large

swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation.

The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing the

dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain

protection for that given point within the system.

Button type transmitters should be periodically tested by the user for battery life

(ex. 5701, 5801, 5802, 5802MN, 5802CP, 5804).

Compatible 5700 Series

Wireless Devices

5701

Panic Transmitter

Programmable for either silent or audible 24-hour alarm (can be DIP

switch programmed for zones 62 or 63).

5711

Slimline Door/Window Transmitter

Can be used with any closed circuit sensor. Can be used on any

zone 1Ð63 but, if set for zones 32-47, there will be a 3-minute lock-

out between transmissions.

5711WM Door/Window Transmitter w/Reed Switch

Can be used with any closed circuit sensor, on any zone 1Ð63 but, if

set for zones 32Ð47, there will be a 3-minute lock-out between

transmissions.

5715WH Universal Transmitter

DIP switch selectable for fast response, open or closed circuit sensor

usage, and has a tamper protected cover. Use in applications where

open circuit heat detectors are needed or where fast response

devices are needed. Can be used on any zone 1-63 but, if set for

zones 32Ð47, there will be a 3-minute lock-out between

transmissions.

5727

5716

Wireless Keypad

The keypad is identified as zone "00" when it transmits low battery

messages. The keypad panics are identified in the same way as wired

keypad panics (i.e. 95, 96 & 99).

Door/Window Transmitter

Can be used with any open or closed circuit sensor (DIP switch

selectable), and features a built-in reed switch. Can be used on any

zone 1-63 but, if set for zones 32-47, there will be a 3 minute lock-out

between transmissions.

5775

Wireless PIR

DIP switch programmable for zones 32Ð47.

NOTE: There is a 3-minute lock-out between transmissions to

preserve battery life.

5706

5707

Wireless Photoelectric Smoke Detector (System Sensor)

DIP switch programmable for zones 48Ð55.

Wireless Photoelectric Smoke Detector (ESL)

DIP switch programmable for zones 48Ð55.

Ð 26 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatible 5800 Series

Wireless Devices

5801...................4-Button Transmitter

5802...................Pendant Panic Transmitter

5802CP..............Belt Clip Panic Transmitter

5802MN..............Belt Clip or Pendant Panic Transmitter

5804...................4-Button transmitter

(Refer to the installation

instructions provided with

each transmitter)

5806...................Photoelectric Smoke Detector

5807...................Photoelectric Smoke Detector

5808...................Photoelectric Smoke Detector

5816...................Miniature Transmitter

5816MN..............Miniature Transmitter

5816TEMP .........Low Temperature Transmitter

5817...................3-Point Transmitter

5818...................Recessed Transmitter

5827...................Wireless Keypad

5849...................Glass Break Detector

5890...................Dual Element PIR

VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (Connector J7)

(Ground St art Module, Keyswit ch, Remot e Keypad Sounder, or a non-Ademco AAV Unit

requiring a Voltage trigger)

General Information

Connector J7, located on the right hand side of the main PCB provides 4 latching

trigger outputs for operating the 675 Ground Start Module, the 4146 Keyswitch,,

a non-Ademco AAV unit, a remote keypad sounding piezo, and for triggering

auxiliary alarm signaling equipment (such as the 7720 and 7920SE LORRA

Subscriber Radios). Note that these output triggers can be enabled by partition

via programming field 2*20.

The pin assignments of this connector are shown below. Use only the 4142TR

9-wire cable (available as an option) for making connections to this connector.

J7 CONNECTOR

N/U

J7 CONNECTOR

FOR VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

GROUND

OUT

GROUND

OUT

GROUND

OUT

GROUND

OUT

4142TR CABLE

OUT 1: GROUND START OR OPEN/CLOSE

OUT 2: FIRE OR KEYSWITCH ARMED LED

OUT 3: BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC/AUXILIARY

OUT 4: SILENT PANIC/DURESS OR KEYSWITCH READY LED

Output 1: Operates, by default, as a trigger for the 675 ground start module. This output

may optionally be programmed via field 1*46 to operate as an open/close trigger,

a remote keypad sounder output , or a trigger for an AAV unit from another

manufacturer, as follows:

1*46 0 = ground start module

1 = open/close trigger

2 = remote keypad sounding

3 = AAV trigger (non-Ademco AAV unit only!)

Only one of these options may be used at any time.

Rating:

When Activated: 10Ð13.8 VDC through 4K

ohms (2.5mA max).

When De-activated: 100 ohms to ground.

(Continued on next page)

Ð 27 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs 2 & 4: Operate, by default, as Fire and Silent Panic/Duress

triggers respectively. These triggers may optionally be

programmed to act as Arm and Ready status indicators

when it is desired to use the 4146 keyswitch.

Output 2, 3, & 4 Rating: When Activated: 10Ð13.8 VDC through 5K ohms

(2mA max).

When De-activated: 1k ohms to ground.

Ground Start Module

An optional 675 Ground Start module can be used for installations having

telephone lines which require ground start instead of loop start operation to

obtain dial tone from the telco central office.

If used, program field 1*46 must be set to "0" (factory default) and the 675

Ground Start Module must be connected to the panel's J7 connector trigger

output 1, to auxiliary power, and to the "RING" side of the telephone line as

shown in the diagram that follows.

Not intended for use in

UL Listed applications.

Use the following procedure to determine which side of the telephone line is the

"RING" side:

a. Connect the "+" lead of a DC voltmeter to earth ground, and the "Ð" lead

to one side of the telephone line.

b. The wire which reads +50VDC is the "RING" side.

When the panel has a message to transmit to the central station, it will seize the

line, go off hook, and then trigger the 675 module to connect the "RING" side of

the telephone line to earth ground. The panel will cause the module to break the

connection between "RING" and earth ground when a dial tone is obtained.

J7 CONNECTOR

4142TR CABLE

GROUND

GRAY

GROUND START

TRIGGER

OUT 1

675

GROUND

START

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

BLUE

GROUND

OUT 2

MODULE

TO AUX. POWER

TERM. 7

(CUT ORANGE

JUMPER)

BLACK

VIOLET

GROUND

OUT 3

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

TO AUX. POWER

TERM. 6

(50mA CURRENT DRAW

BROWN

GREEN

GROUND

OUT 4

IF USED.

TO TELCO TO EARTH

RING GROUND

1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER

USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE

(SEE FIELD 1*46).

BLACK

2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE

USED TO PROVIDE ALARM

STATUS INDICATIONS OR TO

OPERATE A KEYSWITCH

(SEE FIELD *15).

3. THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED.

GROUND START MODULE CONNECTIONS

Remote Keyswitch

If the keyswitch option is selected (field *15), the alarm trigger outputs 2Ð4 are

disabled.

An optional Remote Keyswitch can be used for remote arming and disarming of

the system. Note that keyswitch arming may only be used in one

partition.

If used, program field *15 must be set to the desired partition to enable the

keyswitch option, and the 4146 keyswitch's normally open momentary switch and

LEDs must be connected to Zone 7 and to the J7 connector trigger outputs

respectively. A 2k EOL resistor must be connected across the switch

regardless of whether or not zones 2Ð8 are selected to use EOL

resistors. See keyswitch wiring diagram on the next page.

Note that the system automatically assigns zone type 10 to zone 7 if a keyswitch

is used.

Ð 28 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A momentary short across this zone will arm the system in the "AWAY" mode. If

the short is held for more than 3 seconds, the system will arm in the "STAY"

mode. After the system has been armed, the next time zone 7 is shorted, the

system will disarm.

An optional closed-circuit tamper switch (model 112) can be wired in series with

zone 7, so that, if the switchplate is removed from the wall, the tamper will open,

disabling keyswitch operation until the system is next disarmed from the keypad.

Notes:

Only one keyswitch with LEDs can be supported by the system's

power supply.

Open/close reporting for keyswitch is enabled in field *40, and the

keyswitch reports as user Ò0Ó.

If the keyswitch is used, trigger output 1 can still be used as previously

described in VOLTAGE TRIGGERS section. Trigger outputs 2 & 4 are

used to light the keyswitch LEDs as shown below.

If the keyswitch is used, zone 7 cannot be used as a protection zone.

LED indications are defined as follows:

Green

Red

Meaning

Off

Disarmed & Not Ready

O n

Off

Disarmed & Ready

Armed Away

On Steady

Slow Flash

Rapid Flash

Armed Stay

Alarm Memory

J7 CONNECTOR

N/U

BROKEN LINES REPRESENT

INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS

(ARMED)

(READY)

RED

GREEN

4142TR CABLE

TO AUX POWER

TERMINAL 6

820W

TAMPER

SWITCH (N.C.)

IF KEYSWITCH IS USED.

1. OUT 1 CAN STILL BE USED TO

PROVIDE GROUND START,

OPEN/CLOSE (SEE FIELD 1*46).

TO TERM 20

TO TERM 19

LOCK

SWITCH (N.O.)

TO ZONE 7

2. OUT 2, 3, 4 NO LONGER PROVIDE

ALARM STATUS INDICATIONS. OUT 2

& 4 OPERATE KEYSWITCH LEDs. OUT

3 IS NOT USED. ONLY 1 KEYSWITCH

CAN BE USED.

{

2000

OHMS

3. ZONE 7 IS NO LONGER USABLE AS A

PROTECTIVE ZONE.

EOLR

4146 KEYSWITCH

REMOTE KEYSWITCH WIRING

Ð 29 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Keypad Sounder

Operation & Wiring

An optional Amseco PAL 328N can be used for installations where it is desired to

remote the sounds produced by the keypad's built-in piezo sounder for one

partition. The panel will remote all sounds (i.e. alarm, trouble, chime, entry/exit,

etc.) produced by the keypad's built-in sounder except for the short clicks

associated with keypad key depression. One application of this feature might be

to produce chime sounds in a location which is distant from the panel's keypads.

This can also be accomplished using relay outputs (see Output Relay section).

If used, program field 1*46 must be set to "2" to enable the remote keypad

sounder option, and the Amseco piezo must be connected between the panel's

auxiliary power and the J7 connector trigger output as shown below.

In addition, field *15 must be used to select the partition whose keypad sounds

are to trigger the sounder. Zone 7 must be assigned to be a keyswitch zone

(even if keyswitch is not used).

4142TR CABLE

J7 CONNECTOR

IF USED.

1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER

USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE

OR GROUND START (SEE

FIELD 1*46).

GROUND

GRAY

2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE

USED TO PROVIDE ALARM

STATUS INDICATIONS OR

TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH

(SEE FIELD *15).

OUT 1

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

BLACK

–

GROUND

OUT 2

AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER

GROUND

OUT 3

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

TO AUX POWER +

TERMINAL 6

(10mA CURRENT DRAW)

RED

GROUND

OUT 4

BLACK

REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDING CONNECTIONS

Using A Trigger To

Activate Another

ManufacturerÕs AAV

Unit (if necessary)

If using an Audio Alarm Verification module from another manufacturer, and a

voltage trigger will be used to activate the module, make connections as shown

below. In addition, set program field 1*46 to option 3, and program zone 5 for

response type 10; also, program field 1*60 for Ò1Ó.

Note: If field 1*60 is set for Ò1Ó, zone 5 cannot be used as a protection zone,

and the EOLR must be removed. Refer to the 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS &

AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION section later in this manual for additional

information.

J7 CONNECTOR

4142TR CABLE

TO AUDIO ALARM

VERIFICATION MODULE

(AAV) FALLING EDGE

TRIGGER INPUT

GRAY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

ON THE AAV UNIT

DIODE INCLUDED

WITH EOLR

PACKAGE

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

USING A TRIGGER TO ACTIVATE A NON-ADEMCO AAV UNIT

Ð 30 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6.

RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES

General Information

The VISTA-40 supports up to 8 relay outputs. These outputs may consist of relay

outputs from the 4204 output relay module (4 relay outputs per module) or X-10

device outputs. Outputs can be activated and deactivated by predetermined

events such as turning on lights in the event of an alarm condition and/or closing

a fire door in the event of a fire alarm condition. Refer to ÒRelay ProgrammingÓ in

Section 4 of PART 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES for instructions on

programming relay options.

There are many different uses for relays, some of which are shown at the end of

this section.

4204 Relay Module The 4204 Relay Module has 4 form C (normally open and normally closed

contacts) relays. Each relay can be used independently for different functions.

The 4204 is wired to the control's keypad terminals 6-9. Use standard 4-

conductor twisted cable (for long wire runs) or the connector supplied with the

4204. Each 4204 should be home run back to the panel. The maximum wire run

length from the panel to the 4204 must not exceed:

Wire Gauge

#22

#20

Maximum Length

125 feet

200 feet

#18

#16

300 feet

500 feet

The 4204's DIP switch must be set for a device address and that address must be

enabled in the control's Device Programming mode.

Program the output relays using the control's *93 Menu Mode. Refer to ÒRelay

ProgrammingÓ in Section 4 of PART 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES for

details.

4300 Transformer &

XÐ10 Devices

When using X-10 devices, the 4300 transformer must be used instead of the

1361 transformer shown on the Summary of Connections diagram. The 4300

provides AC power to the panel and relays signals from the panel through the

premises AC wiring to X-10 devices.

Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 interface and the panel. Splice this

cable to a 4142TR cable as shown in the diagram below. Note that the white and

yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together.

X-10 devices plug into standard AC outlets and can be used to perform various

functions. Be sure to set the proper house and unit IDs when using X-10 devices.

UL NOTE: X-10 devices and the 4300 are not UL Listed for fire or

burglary functions and are intended only for home automation.

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

J8 CONNECTOR

Earth

Ground AC

Sync

Com

Data

IN 3

GROUNODUT 5

GROUND

OUT 6

4142TR CABLE

TB1 TB1

-1 -30

TB1

-2

4300 TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS

Ð 31 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7. THE 4285 PHONE MODULE

General

Information

The 4285 Phone Module is an add-on accessory for the VISTA-40 that will permit

access to the security system via a Touch-tone phone (either on premises or by a

call-in when away). Only one Phone Module can be used in this

security system and it must be assigned as device address 04 only

and assigned to partition

using #93 Menu Mode, Device

Programming. The Phone Module normally controls the partition in

which it is installed, but can control the other partition by using

the "GOTO" command.

The 4285 is not permissible in UL installations.

When properly connected, the 4285 Phone Module will enable the user to do

the following via a Touch-tone telephone:

1. Receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of

the security system.

2. Arm and disarm the security system and perform most other commands using

the telephone keypad, with voice annunciation being provided over the

phone as confirmation after any command is entered.

The on-premises phone system need not have Touch-tone service, but the

phone used for phone access must have Touch-tone capability (if premises uses

PULSE dialing, switchable phones should be set for Touch-tone temporarily

before attempting phone access). An off-premises phone that does not have

Touch-tone service and must use Pulse for dialing may not permit switching to

Touch-tone after dialing; in such a case, phone access from that phone will not be

possible.

NOTE: Some digital phone systems may not emit true TouchTone from the

keys, so access may be limited by this type of phone.

The Phone Module can annunciate many of the same words that would normally

be displayed on an Alpha keypad under the same system conditions.

Phone access to the security system from on-premises is possible only by entry

of an installer-programmed 2-digit "phone code" (1Ð9 and * or #). When

attempting to access the security system from a phone outside the premises, a

voice prompt to enter the 2-digit phone code and the 4-digit security code will be

provided.

Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are

provided with the Phone Module. In addition, a PHONE ACCESS USER'S

GUIDE is supplied with the Phone Module for the user of the system.

Mounting The Phone

Module

The Phone Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or,

if this is not possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the Phone

Module's cover prior to wiring.

When the Phone Module is mounted inside the control cabinet, it can be

attached with 2-faced adhesive tape to the cabinet's interior surface. Do not

mount on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board. The Module's

cover can be left off if it is mounted within the cabinet.

When the Module is to be mounted outside the cabinet, screw holes at its rear will

permit it to be mounted horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be

used, if preferred). Wires can be brought out from the side or back (a round

breakout is also available on the back). When the Module's mounting and wiring

is completed, its cover should be installed (with label affixed, as indicated next).

Affix the 4285 connections label (supplied separately) to the inside of the Phone

Module's cover if the cover is used. Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the

control cabinet's door.

Ð 32 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wiring Connections

General

The 4285 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset(s). It

listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel.

During on-premises phone access, it powers the premises phones; during off-

premises phone access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and any

answering machines.

Wiring

1. Make 12V (+) and (Ð) and data in and data out connections from the Phone

Module to the control*, using the connector cable supplied with the Phone

Module as follows:

Color Lead

Terminal On Control

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ

GREEN

BLACK

RED

to DATA IN (terminal 8)*

to AUX Ð (terminal 7)*

to AUX + (terminal 6)*

YELLOW to DATA OUT (terminal 9)*

* These are the same connections as for remote keypads.

2. Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the

Phone Module. See the 4285 Phone Module Wiring Connections diagram

on the next page

3. Connect terminals 1 through 5 on the Phone Module as shown in the

diagram and in the table below.

Note: Use an RJ31X jack with a direct-connect cord and make all connections

exactly as shown. If the leads on the direct-connect cord are too short to reach

their assigned terminals, splice additional wires to them, as required.

TABLE 1

4285 Terminal

1. Phone In (Tip)

2. Phone In (Ring)

3. Phone Out (Tip)

4. Phone Out (Ring)

5. Ground

Connects to:

Terminal (26) on control.

Terminal (27) on control.

BROWN lead from direct-connect cord.

GRAY lead from direct-connect cord.

Earth ground terminal (30) on control.

Future use

6. Audio Out 1

7. Audio Out 1

Future use

ADVISORY

If no touch tones are produced following access to the security system via the 2-

digit phone code from on-premises (this problem may arise in rare cases), it

may be necessary to reverse the wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the

Phone Module and the wires connected to terminals (26) & (27) on the control.

The wiring diagram shows the wiring connections that will provide proper

operation in most cases.

IMPORTANT: The phone module must be properly grounded to the panel in

order to operate. Attach a wire (22-18 gauge) from terminal 5 on the phone

module to terminal 30 on the VISTA-40 control.

CALLER ID NOTE: Some caller ID units may not be compatible with the 4285.

Refer to 4285 wiring diagram on next page for proper connections.

Programming The Control

For Phone Access

The following programming fields must be programmed when using a phone

module:

Using #93 Menu Mode-Device Programming, program the phone module (preset

at address 4) for phone module device type 05 and assign it to

partition 1.

* 2 0 Phone Module Phone Code

* 4 4 Ring Detection Count cannot be set to 0

*74/*75/* 7 8 Alarm Report code for phone module faults (zone 87-99)

1 * 0 9 Zone Response Type for phone module (zones 87-93, type 05)

Ð 33 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zone descriptors must also be programmed, regardless of the type of keypads in

use. If this is not done, the Phone Module will be unable to annunciate a

description of the zone(s) in alarm, trouble, etc. (the Phone Module will

annunciate zone numbers only). In addition, relay voice descriptors can be

programmed if output relays are being used.

Incoming

GROUND TERMINAL

Handset

Telco Line

WIRING NOTES:

TO EARTH GROUND

(COLD WATER PIPE, ETC.)

1. Wire the 4285 Phone

Module exactly as shown,

using a direct-connect

cord and RJ31X jack.

TERMINALS

ON CONTROL

INCOMING TELCO LINE

CALLER ID

UNIT

2. If Touch-tones are not

present following phone

access to the security

system via an on-

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

TIP

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR

EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:

RJ31X

JACK

RING

premises phone, try re-

versing the pair of wires

connected to terminals 3 &

4 on the 4285, and the pair

of wires connected to

terminals 26 & 27 on the

control.

ANY EXISTING WIRES

CONNECTED TO THE

"HANDSET" TERMINALS

ON THE CONTROL MUST

BE MOVED FROM THERE

TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4

ON THE 4285.

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE

CA38A

CANADA

PLUG

AND PHONES

ANSWERING

MACHINE

3. Connection to the incom-

ing Telco line via an

4285

VOICE MODULE

TO GND TERMINAL

(30) ON CONTROL

RJ31X jack and direct-

connect cord, as shown in

this diagram, is essential,

even if the system is not

connected to a central

station. The 4285 will not

function if this is not

done.

NOT INSTALLER

ADJUSTABLE

KEYED

HEADER

*NOTE: IF THE TELEPHONE HAS BUILT-IN CALLER ID,

4. Phone module ground

terminals must terminate

to ground on the control.

THE CALLER ID FUNCTION MAY NOT WORK.

4285

TO CONTROL

PANEL

TERMINALS

USED FOR

KEYPAD

CONNECTIONS

UNUSED

YELLOW: TO DATA OUT (term. 7)

NO CONNECTION

RED:

BLACK: TO AUX. GROUND (–) (term.4)

GREEN: TO DATA IN (term. 6)

TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

5. There must be 7 volts or

greater while phone is "off-

hook" for phone module to

operate.

1 - TIP

2 - RING

3 - TIP

4 - RING

5 - GROUND

6 -

CONNECTOR

WITH FLYING

LEADS

TO AUX (+) (term. 5)

PHONE INPUT

}

PHONE OUTPUT

AUDIO OUT 1

(FOR FUTURE USE)

}

7 -

4285 PHONE MODULE WIRING CONNECTIONS

Installations Where The

Telephone System Includes

An Answering Machine

When accessing the system via a phone, the programmed 2-digit phone code

should be entered during the first 20 seconds of the OUTGOING message on

the answering machine (preferably during a pause in the outgoing message),

before it begins recording an incoming message.

The reason for entry of the phone code during a pause is that touch tones

(produced by entry of the 2-digit phone code) might not be received by the

security system while an answering machine's outgoing voice message is on the

phone line. Also, entering the 2-digit phone code before the answering machine

starts recording will prevent the phone code tones from being recorded.

If there is difficulty obtaining phone access when trying to use this

procedure, instruct the end user to re-record the outgoing message on the

answering machine, but leave a 2-second pause at its beginning.

Example:

(2-SECOND PAUSE) THIS IS 555Ð1212. I CAN'T COME TO THE PHONE

JUST NOW. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE.

Ð 34 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 8. 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS &

AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION (AAV)

General Information

The VISTA-40 features 2-way voice capability when used with the Ademco Voice

Interface Module (VIM) and 6139AV 2-way voice keypads.

IMPORTANT: Audio alarm

verification reports only on the

primary phone number.

The AAV option cannot be used in UL installations

An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) module, such as the Ademco VIM module,

permits voice dialog between an operator at a central station and a person at the

alarm installation, for alarm verification. This feature is supported only if alarm

reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone number. Setting field

1*60 to "0" selects the VIM module.

After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary

phone number, the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages

was an alarm report. If the central station has a 685 receiver Rev 4.6 or higher, the

panel can be either programmed for auto callback or Òlisten in to followÓ. If the

receiver is not a 685 or if the Rev number is lower than 4.6, the AUTO

CALLBACK feature must be enabled in order for the 2-way voice module to

function.

Once triggering occurs, the control will give-up the phone line to the AAV

module, without breaking connection with the central station. During the time the

module is active, all sirens and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will

be shut off. When the module indicates that the audio alarm verification session is

completed, all keypad sounds will be restored. Sirens will be restored if the alarm

timeout period has not expired.

As part of its fail-safe software, the control will limit all audio alarm verification

sessions to 5, 10, or 15 minutes, selectable by programming via #93 (this is

because once the session begins, the AAV module controls the duration). If a

new fire/panic alarm should occur during a session, the control will break phone

connection and send the new fire/panic alarm report, then re-trigger AAV mode.

All other dialer messages triggered during on-going conversation will be held until

either the AAV module signals that it is inactive, or the AAV timeout occurs.

Using the VIM Module

and 6139AV Keypad

To provide 2-way voice capability, the system requires a VIM (Voice Interface

Module) and at least one 6139AV 2-way voice keypad in each partition being

monitored. The system supports up to six 6139AV keypads. The 685 Receiver at

the central station requires software version 4.6 or higher, unless the AUTO

CALLBACK feature is enabled.

Setting The DIP

Switches on the VIM

Module

Set the VIM's DIP switches to the desired device address (01-15) referring to the

VIM wiring diagram on the next page. Address 04 is reserved for the 4285 phone

module. NOTE: The VIM reports as zone 93 for supervision faults.

VIM Module

Connections To

the Control

The VIM connects to the control's keypad terminals in the same manner as any

other keypad. The connection must be home run to the control. The VIM also

connects to the control's "handset" terminals. See the VIM connection diagram

on the next page.

1. Connect the VIM module to the control's keypad terminals using the

connector with Red, Black, Green, and Yellow wires (supplied with the

keypad).

a. Attach the 4-pin keypad connector with 4 flying leads to the 4-pin header

on the right side of the VIM module (see the VIM connection diagram on

the next page for location of the 4-pin header).

b. Connect the flying leads from this connector to the keypad terminals on

the control, as follows:

Red wire to terminal 6.

Black to terminal 7

Green to terminal 8

Yellow to terminal 9.

Ð 35 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Connect 3 wires from terminals 1, 2, and 3 on the right side of the VIM module

to the control, as follows:

a. Terminal 1 to the ground terminal (30) on the control.

b. Terminals 2 and 3 to the ÒhandsetÓ terminals (26 & 27) on the control.

6139AV Audio

Connections To

The VIM Module

Each 6139AV 2-way Keypad requires a shielded 2-wire connection to the VIM

Module. Splice the flying leads of the supplied SA550AB Audio Bus connector

to this shielded cable, then plug the connector into the 6139AV keypad's J5

connector located on the right of the keypad, just beneath the PC board.

Connect the 6139AV keypad(s) to the VIM module as follows:

Keypad 1 (and Keypad 4, if used): to terminals 1, 2, and 3

Keypad 2 (and Keypad 5, if used): to terminals 4, 5, and 6

Keypad 3 (and Keypad 6, if used): to terminals 7, 8, and 9.

IMPORTANT: Connect the shield at the VIM module, but not at the

keypad, as shown in the VIM connection diagram.

If more than three 6139AV keypads are used (up to six 6139AV keypads can be

supported), connect as follows: keypad 4 in parallel with keypad 1, keypad 5 in

parallel with keypad 2, and keypad 6 in parallel with keypad 3.

Terminal 10 can, if you wish, be connected to the audio output on the 4285

module (terminal 6 or 7), if the phone module is used in the system. This will allow

the voice output heard through a telephone via the phone module to be heard

through the built-in speaker in the 6139AV keypad(s).

Programming

Information For the

VIM Module

When programming the system, use #93 Menu ModeÐDevice Programming to

program the following:

¥ Device address as set by the DIP switches (01Ð15).

¥ Device type "7".

¥ Partition 1, partition 2, automatic or all.

¥ Voice session timeout duration (5 min, 10 min, 15 min, or no timeout).

†

COMPATIBLE WITH SELECTED KEYPADS AND CONTROLS

†

{

†

2-WAY

VOICE

2-WAY

VOICE

2-WAY

VOICE

CONNECT TO CONTROL’S KEYPAD TERMINALS

USING CONNECTOR SUPPLIED WITH KEYPAD

KEYPAD

VIM STATUS LED FUNCTIONS

KEYPAD

USE SA550AB AUDIO CONNECTOR SUPPLIED WITH KEYPAD

RED ON

TALK SINGLE

TALK TO ALL

VOX MODE

RED FLASH

GREEN ON

BOTH ON

TO J5

LISTEN SINGLE

AUDIO

CONNECTIONS

BOTH FLASH LISTEN ALL

VIM

ALT. FLASH

BOTH OFF

WAIT ID CODE

IDLE

(VOICE INTERFACE MODULE)

STATUS

LEDs

{

TO EARTH GROUND

TO CONTROL’S

KEYPADS

#1 AND #4

HANDSET

{

RING

USE 2-WIRE SHIELDED CABLE TO CON-

NECT 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS TO VIM

MODULE. CONNECT SHIELD AT VIM

HANDSET

TIP

SHIELD

TERMINALS

CONNECTOR WITH 4

{

MODULE, BUT NOT AT KEYPAD.

FLYING LEADS CON-

NECTS TO CONTROL’S

KEYPAD TERMINALS

KEYPADS

#2 AND #5

IMPORTANT: SET DIP

SWITCHES BEFORE CON-

NECTING 4-PIN PLUG.

4-PIN

{

MICRO-

PROCESSOR

HEADER

KEYPADS

#3 AND #6

YELLOW

NOT USED

RED

SHIELD

AUDIO OUTPUT

BLACK

GREEN

DIP

SWITCH

PHONE

MODULE

(SUPPLIED WITH VIM)

IMPORTANT:

ADDRESS 4 RESERVED FOR VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE MODULE

SET DIP SWITCHES

BEFORE CONNECTING

4-PIN CONNECTOR

FROM CONTROL’S

KEYPAD TERMINALS.

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

SWITCH

POSITION

29 30

–

OFF

–

ON ON

–

ON ON

ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON

–

{

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

(SHOWN SET FOR

ADDRESS “7”)

–

ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

–

CONNECTING THE ADEMCO VOICE INTERFACE MODULE (VIM)

Ð 36 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

¥ Chime option for other partition during 2-way voice session.

¥ VIM text option for displaying voice mode text at the keypad.

¥ VIM AC loss option, when enabled, allows 2-way voice communication after AC

loss (recommended for installations where someone is on a life support device)

¥ The AUTO CALLBACK option, when enabled, allows callback to initiate 2-way

voice communication, otherwise Òlisten in to followÓ (event code 606) is sent at

end of alarm report.

Programming

Information For the

6139AV Keypad

¥ Device address as programmed at the keypad (01-15). Address 00 not

applicable. NOTE: Address 04 is reserved for the 4285 phone module.

¥ Device type "8".

¥ Voice keypad number (01Ð16); this is the keypad's identification number from

the central station operator's point of view. 01Ð06 is recommended.

¥ Keypad's partition (1Ð2).

¥ Keypad's sounder option (0Ð2)

Program VIM fault and siren silencing options by using the #93 Menu Mode -

Relay Programming menu (see Section 4 in the PART 2. PROGRAMMING GUIDE

section of this manual).

AAV Notes

1. The 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not

hold the phone line connection, or if AUTO CALLBACK is enabled, any

receiver can be used.

2. Contact ID code for "listen-in to follow" is "606" if AUTO CALLBACK is

disabled.

3. Field 1*60 must be set for "0" when using the Ademco VIM module. If using

another manufacturerÕs AAV module, enter Ò1Ó.

NOTE: If set to Ò1Ó, zone 5 is no longer available as a

protection zone.

4. Contact ID (field *45 =1) is the only reporting format that will send a "listen-in

to follow" message if AUTO CALLBACK is disabled.

5. Listen-in to follow message is sent only if both the VIM and at least one

6139AV 2-way voice keypad is programmed using #93 Device Programming

mode if AUTO CALLBACK is disabled.

6. Operator callback and AUTO CALLBACK option is enabled if a non- leading-

zero 4-digit number is programmed in field 1*59.

7. Make sure that field 44 (RING DETECTION COUNT) is not set to Ò01Ó.

6139AV Keypad Audio

Level Adjustment

The 6139AVÕs audio level for "talk mode" and "VOX mode" can be programmed

for "high," "medium," or "low." The factory default is "high."

1. Enter the keypad's programming mode by pressing and holding down the [1]

and [3] keys at the same time for 3 seconds. The keypad's address is

displayed.

2. a. Press and hold down the "D" key for 2 seconds. The current talk mode

audio level is displayed (high, medium, or low).

b. Press the [#] key repeatedly to toggle the talk mode level settings from

high to medium to low until the desired level is displayed.

3. a. Press the "D" key again to enter VOX mode level setting. The current

VOX mode audio level is displayed (high, medium, or low).

b. Press the [#] key repeatedly to toggle the VOX mode level settings from

high to medium to low until the desired level is displayed.

4. Pressing the "D" key again returns to the talk mode level setting, etc.

Press [*] to exit keypad programming mode.

Notes:

¥ The keypad returns to normal mode if no key is pressed for 30 seconds.

¥ Powering down the keypad does not change the level setting.

¥ To eliminate undesired keypad feedback (microphonics) during a 2-way audio

session, reduce the VOX mode audio level one level at a time until the

feedback stops.

Ð 37 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using A Non-Ademco Audio

Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit

If you prefer to use another manufacturerÕs AAV unit in place of the Ademco VIM

unit, contact the manufacturer for information regarding the wiring of their unit to

the VISTA-40. When using another manufacturerÕs AAV unit, see Notes below.

Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm

installation. Please be advised that if this option is selected, it may defeat modem

download and 4285 phone module remote access capability. To prevent this,

disable the remote AAV module trigger option. The control also requires that the

AAV module trigger type is falling edge.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

¥ 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not hold

the phone line connection.

¥ Field 1*60 must be set for "1."

Note: When this field is set to Ò1Ó, zone 5 can no longer be used as a

protection zone.

The purpose of zone 5 is to silence the sounders on the control when an

open circuit condition occurs, signalling the start of an AAV session. The open

circuit must be triggered by the AAV module (i.e., a relay). Contact the AAV

moduleÕs manufacturer for specific details.

¥ Zone 5 must be assigned a response type 10.

¥ Field 1*46 must be set for Ò3Ó if the AAV unit requires a trigger. See ÒUsing A

Trigger To Activate Another ManufacturerÕs AAV UnitÓ in the VOLTAGE

TRIGGER (Connector J7) in Section 5 previously.

¥ If using a relay, such as the Ademco 4204, select Ò60Ó for System Operation,

(see ÒRelay ProgrammingÓ in Section 4. PROGRAMMING WITH #93

MENU MODE).

¥ Contact ID code for "listen-in to follow" is "606."

¥ Contact ID (field *45 = 1) is the only reporting format that will send a "listen-in to

follow" message.

Ð 38 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 9. EXTERNAL SOUNDERS

Relay Output

The Control provides a wet bell relay output which is used to power external alarm

sounders. Connections are made to terminals 4 (positive output) and 5 (negative

return). See SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS Diagram.

UL Household Installations

For installations which must provide UL Listed protection, the total current drawn

from this output and the auxiliary power output, combined, must not exceed

750mA in order to comply with the battery independence requirements. If two

System Sensor PA400 piezo alarm sounders, wired in parallel, are used (24mA

total), then 726mA (750mA Ð 24mA) is available for auxiliary output use.

This control complies with National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA) requirements for temporal pulse sounding of fire notification

appliances.

Non-UL Installations

For non-UL installations, the total current drawn from this output can be up to 2.8

amps. A battery must be installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied by

the battery. Up to two 702 sirens can be used, wired in series. Up to two 719

sirens can be used wired in parallel.

Important: Going beyond the above mentioned limits will overload the power

supply or may possibly trip the bell output circuit protector.

Compatible Sounders

Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL installations.

702

Outdoor Siren (not UL

Listed)

¥ Self-contained siren (driver built-in) and weatherproof for outdoor use. Can be

wired for either a steady or yelp sound and is rated at 120 dB @ 10 feet. This

siren can also be tamper protected, or can be mounted in a metal cabinet (716),

which can be tamper protected.

719

Compact Outdoor Siren (not

UL Listed)

¥ Compact, self-contained siren (driver built-in), and weatherproof for outdoor

use. Can be wired for either a steady or yelp sound, and is rated at 90 dB @ 10

feet. A 708BE cabinet is available, which can be tamper protected if necessary.

740

High Intensity Sounder

¥ Compact high intensity sounder rated at 123 dB @ 10 feet. This sounder emits

an 'ear piercing", high frequency sound. This sounder can be mounted indoors

(bracket included) or outdoors (in 708BE cabinet).

747

Indoor Siren

¥ Attractive, self-contained indoor siren (driver built-in), provides steady or warble

tones and is rated at 95dB @ 10 feet.

ABB1031

Motor Bell & Box

¥ AMSECO motor bell & box, rated at 81 dB @ 10 feet.

PA400B (beige)

PA400R (red)

Indoor Piezo Sounder

¥ System Sensor indoor piezo sounder (red or beige), rated at 90 dB @ 10 feet.

Ð 39 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART 2

PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

Ð 40 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1.

GENERAL PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

GENERAL INFORMATION

The system is shipped with a set of pre-programmed default values that are

designed to meet the needs of many installations. These can be changed by the

installer to suit specific needs if desired, by using a 6139 (AV) alpha keypad*. In

addition, four sets of pre-programmed communication default values can also be

loaded by the installer, each set designed for a specific communication format.

These too can be changed to suit the needs of a particular installation.

Review the global and

specific partitioning features

listed in the GENERAL

INFORMATION section of

the Installation Instructions

before programming the

system.

Changes to these pre-programmed values can be programmed directly from the

alpha keypad or from an IBM compatible computer either remotely (using an

approved modem) or at the job site (direct wire downloading using the 4100SM

Serial Module). Both methods use the AdemcoÕs V-Link downloading software

(Rev. 4 or higher) or AdemcoÕs Compass Windows downloading software (be

sure that the software version used includes a VISTA-40 selection).

For alpha keypads, English Language descriptions of the zones and a custom

installer message (which appears when the system is ready to arm) can be

programmed using the built-in vocabulary of words (see #93 MENU MODE,

ALPHA PROGRAMMING section).

* NOTE: The factory loaded defaults (*97) enable keypad addresses 00-03 only.

A keypad with one of these addresses must be used to program the system. If

necessary refer to ÒSetting the Keypad AddressÓ in Section 4.

User-Friendly Zone, Device

& Alpha

Programming

To help set up a partitioned environment quickly and accurately, a user friendly

menu mode has been added. Instead of the traditional method of programming all

the fields associated with zones and the partitions they are associated with, you

may now logically program a zone for all its characteristics as prompted by the

keypad (refer to the #93 MENU MODE section for details). This ensures that you

assign each zone to a partition and that a zone response type has been

assigned.

(#93 Menu Mode)

This User Friendly Menu Mode steps you through the programming options by

prompting you to answer simple yes/no questions. In addition to zone

programming, this mode is also used for programming remote keypad

characteristics, for entering alpha descriptors for wireless & polling loop module

serial number "enrolling" and for relay programming.

Communication Default

Programming

There are four sets of pre-programmed communication defaults available,

including Low Speed, 4+2 Express, Ademco High Speed, and Ademco Contact

ID. Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry standard report

codes that will suit most of your needs. These codes can also be changed as

required. Refer to the COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING section for

instructions.

Data Field Programming mode can be entered in one of two ways.

Entering The Various

Program Modes

A) By depressing the [*] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds after

power is applied to the Control. This method can be suppressed in program

field 1*65.

B) By keying the installer code, followed by depression of [8]+ [0]+ [0] keys.

The factory installer code can be changed once in the program mode. This

method can be suppressed by exiting program mode via *98.

After entry into the program mode, the following will be displayed on an alpha

keypad:

Program Mode

* Fill # View - 00

Following this display, the system is ready to be programmed.

#93 Menu Mode is entered by pressing #93 while in data field programming

mode.

Ð 41 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1 .

2 .

Set the keypads to the appropriate addresses.

Programming Steps

Set factory defaults by pressing *97.

This will automatically enable keypad addresses 00-03, so be sure at least

one keypad is set to one of these addresses.

IMPORTANT:

The programming scheme is

different than other Ademco

controls and from previous

versions of the VISTA-40. Be

sure to review these steps

before attempting to program

this system.

3 .

Program system-wide (global) data fields

Using the programming form as a guide, enter program mode and program

all system wide programming fields, including phone numbers, as well as

any other programming fields required to customize the system to the

needs of the installation. These options affect the entire system,

regardless of partitions. They include control options, downloader and

dialer options, RF options, event logging options, etc. Refer to the

PROGRAMMING DATA FIELDS section for a listing of the program fields

arranged by function.

Note that field 2*00 (number of partitions) & field 1*32 (RF

expander type) must be programmed before continuing.

4 .

Program partition-specific fields

When the system-wide fields have been programmed, program all

partition-specific programming fields by first pressing [*][9][1] to select a

partition 1-2 (while still in data field program mode). Then enter the first

partition-specific field number *09. The next partition-specific field will

automatically be displayed when you are finished entering the value for

field *09. Partition-specific fields can have different values for each

partition. To program the fields for the next partition, press *91, enter the

desired partition number, then enter field *09. Refer to the

PROGRAMMING PARTITION SPECIFIC FIELDS section for detailed

instructions.

5 .

Use #93 Menu Mode for device programming

Refer to the DEVICE PROGRAMMING section to assign keypad ID

numbers and default partitions for each keypad, and to selectively

suppress certain keypad sounding. Use this mode to assign RF receivers

(4281, 5881), output devices (4204 relay module), 4285 phone module

and the VIM voice interface module as well.

6 .

7 .

Use #93 Menu Mode for zone programming

Refer to the ZONE PROGRAMMING section to program zone response

types, assign right loop zones and wireless zones, and assign zones to

partitions and program dialer reports.

Use #93 Menu Mode for programming alpha descriptors

Refer to the ALPHA PROGRAMMING section to enter zone and partition

descriptors and a custom installer's message.

8 .

9 .

Use #93 Menu Mode for programming relays, relay voice

descriptors and custom word voice substitutes.

Set Communication Defaults

Refer to the COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING section for further

instructions if one of the four communication default programming sets is

to be used.

1 0 . Exit Programming Mode

Exit programming mode by pressing either *98 or *99. A second entry of

*99 is required if the exit is being done from fields 1*00 and above.

To prevent re-access to Programming mode using the Installer's code, use

*98. The only way to re-access Programming mode is by depressing both

the [*] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds of power up.

Exiting by using *99 always allows reentry into Programming mode using

the Installer's code. Either way of exiting will allow access via downloading.

IMPORTANT: If local programming lockout is set via downloading,

programming mode cannot be entered at the keypad.

Ð 42 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2. ZONE TYPES

Zone Types & Applicable

Sensors

The VISTA-40 supports up to 64 zones of hard-wire, polling loop and/or wireless

protection, distributed among up to 2 partitions. The following table lists the zone

numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system:

Zone

Sensors

2-wire smoke detectors (if used)

keyswitch (if used)

latching type glass break detectors (if used)

traditional hard-wired zones

5700 series wireless devices

5800 series wireless devices

1Ð9

1Ð63

10Ð64 polling loop devices

* & 1 panic, or A key

# & 3 panic, or C key

* & # panic, or B key

Each zone must be assigned to a zone type, which defines the way in which the

system responds to faults in that zone. In addition, there are three keypad

activated zones (PANIC keys, see note at the end of the definitions) for each

partition, a polling loop supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two for

each RF Receiver installed. Zone types are defined below.

Type 00

Zone Not Used

Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not used.

Type 01

Entry/Exit #1 Burglary.

This zone type provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the control is

armed in the Away or Stay modes. When the panel is armed in the Instant or

Maximum modes, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay begins whenever the

control is armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These delays are

programmable. This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on

doors through which primary entry and exit will take place.

Type 02

Entry/Exit #2 Burglary.

This zone type provides a secondary entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if

the panel is armed in the Away and Stay modes. When the panel is armed in the

Instant or Maximum modes, no entry delay is provided. Secondary exit delay

begins whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming mode selected.

These delays are programmable. This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or

contacts on doors through which secondary entry and exit will take place, and

where more time might be needed to get to and from the keypad. Delay time must

be greater than Zone type 1. (Ex.: a garage, loading dock, or basement door)

Type 03

Perimeter Burglary.

This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is faulted when the panel is

armed in the Away, Stay, Instant or Maximum modes. This zone type is usually

assigned to all sensors or contacts on exterior doors and windows.

Type 04

Interior, Follower.

This zone type gives a delayed alarm (using the programmed Entry/exit time) if

the Entry/Exit zone is faulted first. Otherwise this zone type gives an instant

alarm. This zone type is active when the panel is armed in the Away or maximum

modes. Maximum mode eliminates the delay though. This zone type is

bypassed automatically when the panel is armed in the Stay or

Instant modes. This zone type is usually assigned to a zone covering an area

such as a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass upon entry (After

faulting the entry/exit zone to reach the keypad to disarm the system.) Since this

zone type is designed to provide an instant alarm if the entry/exit zone is not

violated first, it will protect an area in the event an intruder hides on the premises

prior to the system being armed, or gains access to the premises through an

unprotected area.

Ð 43 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type 05

Trouble by Day/Alarm

by Night.

This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted when armed in the Away, Stay,

Instant or Maximum (night) modes. During the disarmed state (day), the system

will provide a latched trouble sounding from the keypad (and a central station

report, if desired). This zone type is usually assigned to a zone which contains a

foil-protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a zone covering a

"sensitive" area such as a stock room, drug supply room, etc. This zone type can

also be used on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate notification of an

entry is desired.

Type 06

24-hour Silent Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to the Central Station but provides no keypad

display or sounding. This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing an

Emergency button.

Type 07

24-hour Audible Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to the Central Station, and provides an alarm sound

at the keypad, and an audible external alarm. This zone type is usually assigned to

a zone that has an Emergency button.

Type 08

24-hour Auxiliary

Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to Central Station and provides an alarm sound at

the keypad. (No bell output is provided). This zone type is usually

assigned to a zone containing a button for use in personal emergencies, or to a

zone containing monitoring devices such as water sensors, temperature sensors,

etc.

Type 09

Supervised Fire. (No

Verification)

This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble condition on

open circuit. The bell output will pulse when this zone type is faulted. This zone

type is always active and cannot be bypassed. This zone type can be

assigned to any hard-wired zone except zone 9, any polling loop

zone, and certain wireless zones.

Type 1 0

Interior w/Delay.

This zone type gives entry delay (using the programmed entry delay 1 time), if

tripped when the panel is armed in the Away mode. This zone type is also active

during maximum mode, but no delay is provided (alarms occur immediately if zone

is tripped). This zone type is bypassed when the panel is armed in

the Stay or Instant modes. Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are

violated, regardless of whether or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.

Type 20

Arm-Stay*

This is a special-purpose zone type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton

units which will result in arming the system in the STAY mode when the zone is

activated.

Type 21

Arm-Away*

This is a special-purpose zone type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton

units which will result in arming the system in the AWAY mode when the zone is

activated.

Type 22

Disarm*

This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton or

contact closure or opening, and which will result in disarming the system when

the zone is activated.

Type 23

No Alarm Response

This zone type can be used on a zone when an output relay action is desired, but

with no accompanying alarm (ex. lobby door access).

* These zone types are not for use by 5700 series devices.

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS

Keypad panic zones share the same zone response type for both partitions, but

panics may be individually enabled for each partition.

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Phone module, RF, VIM and polling loop faults (zones 87, 88-91, 93 & 97) will

report as trouble conditions only, and as such, should be assigned either zone

type 00 if no annunciation is desired, or zone type 05 if annunciation as trouble

condition is desired. See FAULT ANNUNCIATION notes in POLLING LOOP and

WIRELESS EXPANSION sections for more information.

Ð 44 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3. DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM-WIDE (GLOBAL) DATA FIELDS

General Procedure

The global (i.e. non partition-specific) programming fields are grouped into three

sets (referred to as "pages"), as represented in the diagram below. The first page

of fields is accessed automatically after entering a field number. To access the

other pages of fields (indicated on the programming form by a "1" or "2" in front of

the 2-digit field address), press *94. Note that the alpha keypads display the

words ALT PROGRAM MODE along with a "1" or "2", depending on which page

of programming fields are accessed, to indicate the higher page of fields. To

return to the previous page of fields, press *99.

Enter programming mode

(installer code + [8] + [0] + [0])

Enter the first field number (ex. *00, installer's code)

to move to first page

press *99 or *98

to exit program

mode

First Page of fields

(*00-*90)

press *94 to move to 2nd page

second page of fields

(1*01-1*76)

press *99 to move back to 1st page

press *94 to move to 3rd page

press *99 to move back to 2nd page

third page of fields

(2*00-2*21)

To program specific data fields, press [*] plus the 2-digit field address,

then make the required entry. The keypad will beep when a field has been

completely programmed and will automatically display the next field in sequence.

Partitioned programming fields are skipped (refer to PARTITIONING

PROGRAMMING paragraph). If the number of digits that you enter in the data field

is less than the maximum permitted (ex. phone number), the keypad displays the

last entry and waits. To proceed, the next data field to be programmed must be

entered manually (ex. press [*][0][5]).

To view the contents of a data field, press [#] plus the 2-digit field

address. The field's entries will be displayed, but no changes can be made.

In case of errors: If an address is improperly entered, the keypad will display

FC. If a program entry is improperly entered (for example, a larger number than

that which is permitted), the keypad display will go blank. In either case, simply re-

enter the correct number.

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

* 9 4 Next page of fields

* 9 9 Previous page of fields or exit programming mode with no installer

lockout

* 9 1 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

#9 3 Enter Zone/Alpha/Device Programming mode

* 9 8 Exit programming mode with installer code lock-out

Ð 45 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX TO PROGRAMMING FIELDS

In the following pages, the programming fields have been arranged by functional group. Use this index to cross

reference the numerical ordered fields on the programming form with the text.

Field

*00

*02

*03

*04

*05

*09

*10

*11

*12

*13

*14

*15

*16

*17

*18

*19

*20

*21

*22

*23

*24

*25

*26

*27

*28

*29

*3 0

*3 1

*32

*3 3

*3 4

*35

*36

*37

*38

*39

*4 0

*41

*4 2

*4 3

*4 4

*4 5

*4 6

*4 7

*4 8

*4 9

Group

Field

*5 0

*5 1

*5 2

*5 3

*5 4

*5 5

*5 6

*5 7

*5 8

*5 9

*6 0

*6 1

*6 2

*6 3

*6 4

*6 5

*6 6

*6 7

*6 8

*6 9

*7 0

*7 1

*7 2

*7 3

*7 4

*7 5

*7 6

*7 7

*7 8

*7 9

*8 0

*8 1

*8 2

*83

*84

*85

*86

*87

*88

*8 9

*90

1*01

1*02

1*03

1*04

1*05

Group

Field

1*06

1*07

1*08

1*09

1*28

1*29

1*30

1*31

1*32

1*33

1*34

1*35

1*36

1*37

1*38

1*39

1*40

1*41

1*43

1*44

1*45

1*46

1*47

1*48

1*49

1*52

1*53

1*57

1*58

1*59

1*60

1*70

1*71

1*74

1*75

1*76

2*00

2*01

2*02

2*17

2*18

2*19

2*20

2*21

Group

Control

Dialer

#93 Menu Mode

Wireless

#93 Menu Mode

Partition-Specific

Control

Dialer

Wireless

Dialer

Wireless

Dialer

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Control

Dialer

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Wireless

Partition-Specific

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Wireless

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Downloading

Wireless

Dialer

Partition-Specific

Dialer

Wireless

Control

Dialer

Downloading

Partition-Specific

Dialer

Event Logging

Scheduling

Partition-Specific

Partitioning

Real-Time Clock

Partitioning

Partition-Specific

Partitioning

Partition-Specific

Control

Partition-Specific

Control

Partition-Specific

Dialer

Control

Dialer

Partition-Specific

#93 Menu Mode

Dialer

Ð 46 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS

The following section arranges the global (system wide) program fields into the

following functional groups:

Control Options

Downloading Options

Dialer Options

Wireless Options

Partitioning Options

Event Logging Options

Note that zone response types can be programmed in fields *02-*05 &

1*01-1*09, but it is recommended that they be programmed via the #93 Menu

Mode. For this reason, these fields are not discussed in this section.

Control Options

* 0 0

Installer Code

The Installer's Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use, but

can be used by the customer if needed. This is the only code that can be used to

enter the Program mode from the keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm

the system if not used to arm, or if Quick Arm was used to arm system. This code

cannot reenter programming mode if exited by the *98 command.

* 1 4

* 1 5

Zone 9

Response Time

Enter 1 to set fast response mode (10 mSec) for appropriate devices wired to

zone 9. Enter 0 for normal response, 350 msec. Must be 0 for UL.

Keyswitch

Assignment

Enter the partition number 1-2 in which the keyswitch is being used; otherwise,

enter 0. Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 no longer available as

protection zone when used for keyswitch operation). If the keyswitch is used, the

fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY

status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs. NOTE: Zone type 10 is

automatically assigned to zone 7 if a keyswitch is used. Reports openings/closing

by user "0" if reporting is enabled in field *40.

* 1 7

* 1 8

* 1 9

AC Loss Keypad

Sounding

Entering 1 enables sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) when AC power is

lost is desired. Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired.

UL AC Loss

Siren

Entering 1 enables the external alarm sound after AC power has been out for 4

hours; otherwise enter 0 (no alarm).

Randomize

AC Loss Report

Enter 1 to randomize AC loss reporting between 10-40 min. after an actual AC

loss. Enter 0 for normal AC loss reporting (about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central

station during a community blackout.

* 2 0

* 2 1

Phone Module

Phone Code

If an 4285 phone module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used to

access the system. Enter 01-09 for first digit, and enter 11 (for T) or 12 (for #) for

second digit. To disable the phone module, enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter

11 for the 2nd digit of the code (disable code = [0T]). Must be disabled for UL

installations.

Prevent Fire

Time-Out

Enter 1 to disable (no timeout) the alarm sounder duration for any zone

designated as a fire zone, regardless of partition, so that fire sounding continues

until the system is reset. Enter 0 if the normal burglary alarm sounder duration

(programmed in partition-specific field *13) should apply to fire alarms.

* 2 4

* 2 5

Ignore Expansion

Zone Tamper

Only applicable if certain polling loop RPMs or 5800 series transmitters are used.

This option is used to disable this module's tamper detection. Enter 1 to disable.

Enter 0 if tamper detection is desired.

Burg. Trigger For This field allows optional triggering of the voltage output on pin 7 of the J7 header

Response Type 8 for zone response type 8 (24hr. auxiliary). The 0 disable selection is useful if J7

header pin 7 is used for a panic trigger, and non-panic devices are used for all

zones assigned to zone response type 8 (e.g. water sensor, temp. sensor). If

disabled, only burglary or audible panic alarms will trigger pin 7. Otherwise, enter 1.

* 2 6

Intelligent

Test Reporting

Enter 1 if it is desired that no test report be sent if any other type of report was sent

since the last test report. Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals,

regardless of other reports having been sent. Must be 0 for UL applications.

Ð 47 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control Options (continued)

* 2 7

Test Report

Interval

Enter the test reporting interval in hours, 001-199. Enter 000 if no test

reporting is desired. If a test report is desired, enter a test code in fields *81 &

*82, location 7. Max. 024 for UL.

* 2 8

Power Up In

Previous State

Enter 1 if it is desired that upon power-up, the system will assume the system

status prior to power down. Enter 0 if it is desired that the system will always

power up in a disarmed state. When the system powers up armed, an alarm will

occur 3 minutes after arming if a zone is faulted. When so armed, reports closing

as User #0 if open/close reporting for installer was enabled in field *39. Note that

if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY, the system may not respond to

sensor changes for a small period of time (1-3 min.), which allows time for sensors

such as PIRs to stabilize. Must be 1 for UL applications. Instruct users that

authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to disarm the system if control powers up

armed.

* 4 1

* 8 3

Normally Closed

or EOLR

(Zones 2-8)

Enter 0 if end-of-line resistors are to be used. Enter 1 if end-of-line resistors are

not to be used (normally closed loops that detect only an open and do not require

end-of-line resistors). Must be 0 for UL.

First Test

Report Time

Enter the day (01-07) and time (00-23 hours/00-59 min.) that the first test

report shall be transmitted. 00 entry in all locations signifies immediately upon

exiting. Note that day 01=Monday. See fields *81 & *82 for assigning the Test

Report code. Do not use "00" for the day unless the other locations are also "00".

* 8 6

4208 Module

Zone Assignment

Entering 1 allows a single 4208 to be

set to zone numbers 10-17 (see

table), but precludes the use of any

other polling loop expansion. Enter 1

only when the total polling loop

expansion consists of a single 4208

module programmed for zones 10-

17. No other polling loop expansion

is supported with this setting. Enter 0

for all other configurations, such as

no 4208, more than one 4208 or

other polling loop expansion present.

Note: The addresses must match the

table to the left.

4208 Zone #s available when:

*86 = 1

*86 = 0

10-17

10-16

17-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

Precludes use of

any other polling

loop expansion.

Note: When *86 =1

4208 DIPs must be set to:

With word "OFF"

sw 2 = ON

sw 3 = ON

sw 4 = ON

sw 5 = OFF

With word "ON"

sw 2 = OFF

sw 3 = OFF

sw 4 = OFF

sw 5 = ON

2nd PAGE FIELDS (PRESS *94 TO DISPLAY "1" PREFIX)

1 * 4 6 Auxiliary

Output Enable

Enter 0 if ground start output is required; enter 1 if the auxiliary output will be

used to produce an open/close trigger (produced only if all partitions are armed);

enter 2 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce keypad-like sounding at an

auxiliary sounder (ex. 706-12) This option applies only to the partition set in field

*15. Enter 3 to allow the ground start line to function as a two-way audio (AAV)

trigger if using another manufacturerÕs AAV unit.

NOTE: Only one of the above options can be active within a system.

1 * 5 9 VIM Audio

Callback ID

Enter the 4-digit callback code (0-9 for each digit, except no "0" as first digit). This

code is re*uired when the central station operator wants to re-initiate a 2-way

voice session (after previously canceling the session by pressing "88"). Entering

a leading 0 disables operator callback.

1 * 6 0 VIM AAV Module

Must be Ò0Ó for Ademco VIM module. If using another manufacturerÕs AAV unit,

set to Ò1Ó. Note: If set to Ò1Ó, zone 5 is no longer available as protection zone.

3rd PAGE FIELD (PRESS *94 TO DISPLAY "2" PREFIX)

2 * 2 1 Supervision Used for supervised connection to 7920SE. Enter 1 to enable pulses for each

Pulses For LORRA type of LORRA triggers. This option causes the control to send periodic short

Trigger Outputs

pulses on the J7 radio triggers. These pulses are used by the 7920SE to

determine that its connection to the control is still intact. Enter 0 if not desired.

Ð 48 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Downloader Options

*35

Download

Phone No.

This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized. Enter the downloading

phone number, up to 12 digits (0-9), or #11 (*), #12 (#), #13 (Pause). Do not fill

unused spaces.

* 3 6

Download ID No.

Enter 00Ð09; A-F (10Ð15). Only applicable if downloading will be utilized. Make

entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:

00=0

01=1

02=2

03=3

04=4

05=5

06=6

07=7

08=8

09=9

10=A

11=B

12=C 15=F

13=D

14=E

* 3 7

Download

Command

Enables

Each of the various remote (from the central station) functions can either be

enabled or disabled. Disabling a function means that the central station will not be

able to perform that function with respect to this system. Enter 1 to enable a

function, and 0 to disable a function. See field 1*53 for Callback disable option.

For UL installations, all entries must be 0.

2nd PAGE FIELD

1*53 Download

Callback

Enter 1 if callback is not required when downloading. Enter 0 if callback is

required. Must be 0 for UL.

Dialer Options

*30

Touch-Tone

Or Rotary Dial

Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used. Enter 0 if rotary phone service is

used.

IMPORTANT!: Do not select a dialing method that is not legally permitted by

the telephone company for the particular subscriber. If selecting touch-tone,

make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for touch-tone service.

Note that whether or not touch-tone dialing for call placement is permitted,

communication by the use of DTMF signaling (Ademco High Speed) will still take

place. See field 1*33 for Touch-Tone w/Rotary backup.

* 3 1

PABX

Access Code

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers 00-09; B-F (11-15). If not

required, enter nothing and proceed to next address; otherwise, enter prefix

needed to obtain an outside Telco line. This field may be used alternatively to

enter a prefix that can suppress the Telco's call waiting feature from interfering

with outgoing transmissions. This prefix is only useful if the Telco option to

suppress call waiting has been obtained by your customer. The prefix to be used

is 01010700 if rotary dialing is being used or 140700 if touch-tone dialing is being

used. Each entry is a 2-digit entry so as to allow use of hexadecimal digits (B-F).

Do not use hexadecimal digit A. Only enter digits required. Do not fill unused

spaces.

*33

*34

Primary

Phone Number

Enter the primary phone number, up to 12 digits, 0-9, or #11 (*), #12 (#), #13

(Pause). This is the phone number the control will use to transmit alarm and status

messages to the central station. Do not fill unused spaces. Note that back-up

reporting (8 calls are made to the secondary phone number if no

acknowledgment is received after 8 attempts to the primary number) is automatic

only if a secondary phone number is entered.

Secondary

Phone Number

This field enables backup reporting if field *51 Dual Reporting and/or 1*34 Split

Reporting is not enabled. Enter the secondary phone number, up to 12 digits,

0-9, or #11 (*), #12 (#), #13 (Pause). The secondary phone is the number that

the control will use if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful. Do

not fill unused spaces. If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account

number (field *90) must also be programmed (can be the same as the primary

account number).

* 4 0

* 4 2

Open/Close

Reporting

For Keyswitch

Enter 1 if open/close reporting for the keyswitch is desired. Enter 0 if reporting is

not desired.

Dial Tone Pause

This field sets the delay time for the Dial Tone Detect option, if true dial tone is not

selected in that field. Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows:

Enter single digit, 0 = 5 secs; 1 = 11 secs; or 2 = 30 secs. Must be 0 for UL.

Ð 49 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dialer Options (continued)

* 4 3 Dial Tone

Detection

Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing, or if it

will wait for a predetermined delay before dialing (delay is programmed in Dial

Tone Pause field *42). The latter may be necessary in high-noise environment

Telco networks where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in

premature dialing. Enter 1 for true dial tone wait. If no dial tone is detected, will dial

at end of pause programmed in field *42. Enter 0 to pause for seconds entered

in field *42, then dial.

* 4 4 Ring Detection

Count

Only applicable if central station initiated downloading will be used. Enter 00 to

disable ring detection. Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14. Enter 15 to select

answering machine mode that allows the system to receive calls even when a

telephone answering machines is connected to the same phone line. In the

answering machine mode, the download caller should let the phone ring once,

then hang up, then call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing one

ring followed by nothing, will not answer that call, but will ready itself to pick up on

the first ring the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds (the

downloader calling again). DO NOT USE Ò00Ó if 4285 Phone module is being

used. DO NOT USE Ò01Ó if the VIM module is being used.

* 4 5 Primary Format

This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone line. Enter

the appropriate number for the primary format as follows: 0=Low Speed;

1=Contact ID; 2=Ademco High Speed; 3=Ademco Express.

Note: Contact ID (1) is the only reporting format that will send a "listen-in to

follow" message when using a n AAV unit.

* 4 6 Low Speed

Format (Primary)

Enter the appropriate value: 0=Ademco Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

* 4 7 Secondary Format

This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone line. Enter the

appropriate number for the secondary format as follows: 0=Low Speed; 1=Contact

ID; 2=Ademco High Speed; 3=Ademco Express

* 4 8 Low Speed

Format (Sec.)

Enter the appropriate value: 0=Ademco Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

* 4 9 Checksum

Verification

Enter 1 for either or both primary/secondary formats to send a verification digit to

validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds.

Valid for 3+1, 4+2, and Ademco High Speed reports. Enter 0 if not desired.

* 5 0 Sescoa/Radionics

Select

Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.

Enter 1 if SESCOA format is to be used with only numeric reporting (0-9). This

selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

* 5 1 Dual Reporting

This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone

numbers. Enter 1 if it is desired that all reports are sent to both primary and

secondary phone numbers. If dual reporting is desired and Ademco High Speed

format is to be used at all, it must be selected as both the primary and secondary

transmission formats. If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to

both primary & secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If

used with Split Reporting option 2, open/close and test messages go to both

lines, while all other reports go to primary.

* 5 2 Standard/

Expanded Report,

Primary

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone line.

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

* 5 3 Standard/

Expanded Report,

Secondary

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone line.

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

Enter the appropriate report codes for each zone used in the system.

*54-*78 Report Codes

For Zones 1-64, 87-99

* 7 9 Zone Type

Restores For

Zone Types 1-8

Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types. Enter 0 if no

restore report is desired for a zone type.

Ð 50 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dialer Options (continued)

* 8 0

Zone Type

Restores

For Types 9-10

Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types. Enter 0 if no

restore report is desired for a zone type.

*81-*82 Non-Alarm

Report Codes

Enter the appropriate report codes as indicated on the programming form.

* 8 9

Restore

Report Timing

Enter 0 for instant restore report, as zone restores. Enter 1 for reporting after bell

timeout if zone restored. Enter 2 for restore report when system is subsequently

disarmed

2ND PAGE FIELDS

1*33 Touch-Tone

Enter 1 to enable Rotary back-up dialing if communicator was not successful on

dialing using touch-tone DTMF on first attempt. Enter 0 if this option is not be to

be used.

W/Rotary Backup

1*34 Comm. Split

Report Selection

This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary

phone number. Enter 0, 1, or 2, in accordance with the following: 0 = split

reporting disabled; 1 = alarm, alarm restore & cancel reports sent to primary Telco

number, all others to secondary Telco number; 2 = open/close & test reports

sent to secondary Telco number and all other reports to primary. See *51 for

split/dual reporting comments.

Enter the appropriate code as shown on the programming form.

1*40-1*41 Arm Stay

& Time Set Report

C o d e s

Wireless Options

1 * 2 8 RF TX Low

Battery Sound

Enter 0 if audible beep and display annunciation upon RF transmitter low battery

condition is desired only in disarmed state. Enter 1 if audible beep and display is

desired in both armed and disarmed states. Must be 1 for UL.

1 * 2 9 RF TX Low

Battery Report

Enable

Enter 1 if a trouble message for RF transmitter low battery conditions is to be sent

to the central station. Enter 0 if no report for transmitter low battery is desired.

Note that a trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure

independent of this selection. Must be 1 for UL.

1 * 3 0 RF Rcvr

Supervision

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments. Enter 02-15 times 2

hours (4-30 hours). Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time

entered will result in activation of the response type programmed for zone 90 for

the first receiver and zone 88 for the second receiver and their related

communication reports. Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision. Max. "6" (12 hr)

for UL.

Check-In Interval

1 * 3 1 RF Transmitter

Check-In Interval

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments; enter 02-15 times 2

hours (4-30 hours). Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal

within the time entered will result in a trouble response and related

communication report. Entry 00 disables transmitter supervision. Max. "6" (12 hr)

for UL.

1 * 3 2 Receiver Type

Enter 1 if using 4281 series receivers. enter 2 if using 5881 series receivers.

0 = none.

1 * 4 4 Wireless Keypad

Tamper Detect

Enter 1 to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad. Enter 0 if tamper

detection is not desired. If this feature is enabled, any attempt to tamper by

means of many trial entries at a wireless keypad will be blocked by the control

panel. If more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence

(arm, disarm, etc.), the Control panel will disable the wireless keypad. The inhibit is

removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired keypad.

1 * 4 8 Wireless Keypad

Assignment

Enter the partition in which the RF keypad is used, 1-2. Enter 0 if no RF keypad

is used.

1 * 4 9 Suppress TX

Supervision

Sound

Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check-in failure. Enter 0 if

audible trouble sounding is desired. Must be "0" for UL.

Ð 51 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wireless Options (cont.)

1 * 5 7 Enable 5800

RF Button

Global Arm

Enter 1 to have the system arm/disarm in accordance with the button's user's

global arming settings. Enter 0 if the button is not to be used to global arm the

system (however, home partition arming will still occur).

1 * 5 8 Enable 5800

RF Button

Force Bypass

Enter 1 to allow the RF Button user to force bypass all faulted zones. When

attempting to arm the system, the keypad will beep once after pressing the

button, if any faulted zones are present. If this feature is enabled, the user should

then press the button again within 4 seconds to force bypass those zones and

arm the system. Must be disabled for UL installations.

Partitioning Options

2 * 0 0 Number Of

Partitions

Enter the number of partitions 1-2 to be used in the system.

2 * 1 7 Number Of User

Codes Per

Partition

Enter 01-69 for each partition used in the system. Enter 01 for an unused

partition. Total number of user codes in the system must be less than or equal to

70. Note that one user number is automatically assigned (installer code) to each

partition, regardless of whether that partition has been enabled.

2 * 1 9 Use Partition

Descriptors

Enter 1 if partition descriptors will be programmed. If enabled, certain keypad

displays will include a partition number and the partition descriptor (if programmed

in #93 Menu Mode). Entering 0 causes the keypads to display a non-partitioned

system type of display (no partition number will appear).

Relay Output Options

SECOND PAGE FIELDS

1 * 7 4 Relay Timeout

XX Minutes

Enter the relay timeout, 0-127 in multiples of 2 minutes, desired for #93 Menu

Mode Relay Programming output command "56" (refer to the #93 Menu Mode

section in this manual).

1 * 7 5 Relay Timeout

YY Seconds

Enter the relay timeout, 0-127 seconds, desired for #93 Menu Mode Relay

Programming command "57" (refer to the #93 Menu Mode section in this

manual).

Real-Time Clock Options

THIRD PAGE FIELDS

2 * 0 1 Daylight

Savings Time

Start/End Month

Enter the months 00-12 in which daylight savings time starts and ends. Enter

00, 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user's region. Standard

setting for U.S. is 04,10.

2 * 0 2 Daylight

Savings Time

Start/End

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows: 1=first;

2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last. Standard

setting for U.S. is 01,05.

Weekend

Event Logging Options

SECOND PAGE FIELDS

1 * 7 0 Event Log

Types

Enter 1 for each of the types of events for which event logging is desired, as

shown on the programming form. Otherwise enter 0.

1 * 7 1 12/24 Hour Time

Stamp Format

Select the type of time stamping desired: 0 = standard 12 hour; 1 = 24 hour

format.

Ð 52 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC DATA FIELDS

General Procedure

Values for some programming fields are system wide (global), and some can be

different for each partition (partition-specific). If the system is set up for 2 partitions

(field 2*00 = 2), the partition-specific programming fields are automatically

skipped when programming the global fields. The table below lists the partition-

specific fields that can be defined for each partition.

To access partition-specific fields,

1. Press *91, which will prompt you for the partition number desired.

2. Enter a partition-specific field number (ex. *09) to begin programming. When

the first fieldÕs entry is completed, the next partition-specific field will

automatically be displayed. When all partition-specific fields are programmed,

the system returns to the global programming fields (page 1 fields). To return

to the global program fields before finishing all fields, enter any global field

number.

3. Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation.

PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC FIELDS

Press *91 to select a partition

Enter a Partition-Specific Field Number

Selected Partition

Set of Fields

Exits to global page 1 program fields

Press *91 to select next partition.

Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any

time.

Partition-Specific Field Descriptions

* 0 9

Entry Delay #1

Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to reenter the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the

system without sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within this

period or an alarm will occur. Enter the entry delay time (01-15 times 15 seconds

or 00 for no delay), up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds (entry 15 times 15

seconds), for the zone assigned to Entry Delay #1. Maximum 3 for UL

installations.

* 1 0

Exit Delay #1

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after

arming the system without setting off the alarm. Enter the exit delay time (01-15

times 15 seconds or 00 for no delay), up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds, for

the zone assigned to Exit Delay #1. Maximum 4 for UL installations.

* 1 1

* 1 2

* 1 3

Entry Delay #2

Exit Delay #2

Entry Delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Entry Delay #2 zone type. Note that

this delay must be longer than Entry Delay #1. Maximum 3 for UL installations.

Exit delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Exit Delay #2. Note that this delay

must be longer than Exit Delay #1. Maximum 4 for UL installations.

Alarm Sounder

Duration

Defines the length of time an external sounder and the keypad's sounder will

sound for all audible alarms (multiply entry 01-15 by 2 minutes for actual duration).

This duration can be overridden by the Fire Timeout Disable option (field *21) for

fire alarms. Minimum 4 minutes for UL.

* 1 6

Confirmation Of

Arming Ding

Enter 1 to enable 1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end of exit

delay #1. If enabled, it will also ding upon communication kissoff if sending close

reports. Otherwise enter 0.

* 2 2

* 2 3

Keypad Panic

Enables

Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition. Otherwise

enter 0.

Multiple Alarms

Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone

during an armed period. Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more

frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This selection

applies to local sounding and has no impact on the number of communication

messages transmitted. Refer to Swinger Suppression for limiting communication

messages. Enter 1 if this feature is desired. Enter 0 if not desired.

— 53 Ñ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Partition-Specific Field Descriptions (continued)

*29

Quick Arm

Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT or

MAXIMUM modes by using the # key instead of the security code. When armed,

reports closing as User 0 if open/close reporting for User #2 (typically a master

level user) was enabled for a given partition. If quick arm is used, the installer code

and authority level 5 code cannot disarm the system. Enter 0 if Quick Arm is not

desired. In either case, the security code must always be used to disarm the

system.

* 3 2

* 3 8

Primary

Enter a 3 or 4 digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account

Subscriber Acct # number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow

entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3 digit account number is to be used, only

enter data in the first 3 locations, leaving the last one unfilled, by entering a *.

Prevent Zone XX

Bypass

Entering a zone number (01-64) prevents that zone from being bypassed by the

user. Enter 00 if this feature is not desired (all zones can be bypassed). This does

not affect fire zones, which the system prevents from being bypassed.

* 3 9

* 8 4

Open/Close Report Enter 1 if open/close reporting for the installer is desired. Otherwise enter 0

For Installer Code

(disable).

Swinger

Suppression

This option limits the number of messages (Alarms or Troubles) sent for a specific

channel in an armed period (Swinger Suppression). Enter 01-15. If 00 is

selected, all Alarm or Trouble codes are reported. Must be 00 (disabled) for UL.

* 8 5

Enable Dialer

For Panics &

Duress

Enter 1 for each panic/duress for which reporting is desired. Otherwise enter 0

(disable).

* 8 7

* 8 8

* 9 0

Entry Warning

Enter 0 for 3 short beeps, or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry

delay period.

Burg. Alarm

Comm. Delay

Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication, or 1 for 16-second delay

(no delay on 24-hour reports).

Secondary

Enter the 3 or 4 digit number (depending on report format) for the secondary

Subscriber Acct # subscriber account, 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry so

as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit number is to be used, only

enter data in the first 6 locations, leaving the last two unfilled. Default=15 15 15

15. Erase the field by entering *90*. NOTE: This field must be programmed if a

secondary phone number is used (field *34). This account number can be the

same as the primary account number.

2nd Page Fields

1 * 4 3 Permanent

Keypad

Backlighting

Enter 1 if it is desired that backlighting for the keypad display remain on at all times.

Enter 0 if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed. The backlighting

then turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity. Note that when a key is

pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that partition.

1 * 4 5 Exit Delay

Sounding

Enter 1 if beeps from the keypads during exit delay is desired. Enter 0 for no

keypad sound during exit delay.

1 * 4 7 Chime On

Ext. Siren

Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder. If not desired,

enter 0.

1 * 5 2 Send Cancel

If Alarm + OFF

Enter 1 if no report restriction is desired. Enter 0 if cancel reports are to be sent

within Bell Timeout period only.

1 * 7 6 Access Control

Relay

The system can be programmed to provide user activated access control. If

enabled, the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his

code and presses "0". Enter the relay number (00-08) for the relay that will be

used for access control. Enter 00 if not used in this partition.

3rd Page Fields

2 * 1 8 Enable GOTO

Enter 1 if this partition is to be accessed by a GOTO command. Otherwise enter

0=disable for displayed partition; 1=enable for displayed partition

For This Partition 0.

2 * 2 0 Enable

J7 Triggers

By Partition

Ð 54 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4.

PROGRAMMING WITH #93 MENU MODE

General Information

NOTE: The following fields should be preset before beginning:

2*00 (Number of Partitions); 1*32 (receiver type). In addition,

receivers should be programmed via Device programming.

After programming all system-related programming fields in the usual way, press

#93 while still in programming mode to display the first choice of the menu driven

programming functions, which are as follows:

For programming the following:

ZONE PROG?

¥ Zone Number

0=NO

1=YES

¥ Zone Response Type

¥ Hardwired zone

¥ RF Zone

¥ Right/left Loop Zone

¥ Serial number RPM zone

¥ Partition Number for Zone

¥ Dialer report code for zone

For entering 5800 series transmitter & polling loop

device serial numbers into the system.

SERIAL PROG?

0=NO 1=YES

For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

ALPHA PROG?

0=NO 1=YES

¥ Zone Descriptors

¥ Installer's Message

¥ Custom Words

¥ Partition Descriptors

¥ Relay Descriptors

For defining the following device characteristics for

addressable devices, including keypads, RF

receivers (4281/5881) and 4204 output relay

modules:

DEVICE PROG?

0=NO 1=YES

¥ Device Address

¥ Device Type

¥ Device's Home Partition

¥ Keypad Options

¥ Phone Module

¥ VIM Module

For defining output relay (or Powerline carrier)

functions.

RELAY PROG?

0=NO

1=YES

For entering voice descriptors to be used with

phone module functions.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=NO

1=YES

For creating custom word substitutes for phone

module annunciation.

CUSTOM INDEX #?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 to return to data field programming mode.

Enter 0 to display the next menu selection.

QUIT MENU MODE?

0=NO 1=YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0

will display the next choice in sequence. Refer to the ÒZone ProgrammingÓ

section for instructions for programming zone characteristics, the ÒDevice

ProgrammingÓ section for instructions for programming addressable devices, and

the ÒAlpha ProgrammingÓ section for programming alpha descriptors. The

following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands

#93 Enters Menu mode

[*]

[#]

Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

Backs up to previous screen.

Press to answer NO

1 Press to answer YES

01Ð99 All entries are 2-digit entries.

00 Returns to the QUIT MENU MODE? prompt.

Ñ 55 Ñ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zone Programming

Important!: Note that before programming zone characteristics,

field 2*00 (number of partitions) and field 1*32 (receiver type)

must be programmed. This identifies the use of RF Receivers and

the number of partitions being used in the system.

Enter Programming mode, then press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?".

Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode. The

following screens will appear. Press [*] to display the

next screen. Press # to display a previous screen.

ZONE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO

Enter the zone number to be programmed (01-64,

ENTER ZN NO.

87-91, 92, 93, 95, 96, 97 or 99). Press [*] to accept

entry. Enter 00 to return to the main menu

selections.

00=QUIT 20

A summary screen for that zone will appear. The "N"

Zn ZT P RC In: L

after the colon indicates the loop number to which

20 00 1 00 RF: N

the sensor is connected.

Summary Screen -

Each zone in a system must be assigned to a zone

20 ZONE TYPE

type, which defines the way in which the system

ZONE DISABLED 00

responds to faults in that zone. Refer to the ZONE

TYPE DEFINITIONS section for definitions of each

zone type. Enter the zone response type for each

zone. The screen will automatically display the zone

type for the number entered. Press [*] to accept

entry. If a different zone response type is desired,

enter a different number and press [*].

For UL applications, use of 1 or 2 RF receivers

requires enabling their respective faults (88-91) as

applicable (type 5).

Zone Types are as follows:

00 Assign for unused zones

01 Entry/Exit #1, burglary

02 Entry/exit #2,

03 Perimeter, burglary

04 Interior follower, burglary

05 Trouble by day/Alarm by night, burglary

06 24 hour silent alarm

07 24 hour audible alarm

08 24 hour auxiliary

09 Fire

10 Interior delay, burglary

20 Arm-stay (for 5800 transmitters only)

21 Arm-away (for 5800 transmitters only)

22 Disarm (for 5800 transmitters only)

23 No alarm response

Enter the partition number (1-2) in which this zone is

located.

20 PARTITION

Enter the report code for this zone.

20 REPORT CODE

Ð 56 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zone Programming

(continued)

Enter the device type as follows: 0=device not used;

1=hardwired; 3=supervised RF transmitter (RF);

4=unsupervised RF transmitter (UR); 5=RF button

type transmitter (BR); 6=serial number polling loop

device (SL); 7=DIP switch type polling loop device

(DP); 8=right loop of DIP switch type device (PS).

Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a

4190WH zone expander module and/or 4278 PIR,

which allow hard-wired devices to be monitored by

the polling loop.

If the zone was programmed as input type 1, 7 or 8,

the summary display appears. The display will then

repeat with the zone number question for

programming the other zones in the system. Enter

00 to exit back to normal programming mode.

20 INPUT TYPE

RF TRANS. RF:

Note that input types 4 & 5

are valid for certain 5800

series transmitters only

(ex. 5801, 5802, 5802CP).

When using 5700 series

transmitters, always set

the input type to type 3.

The zone number of the

transmitter identifies

whether or not supervision

is required (ex. 5700

wireless zone number 63 is

not supervised).

If this is a previously "enrolled" sensor, the loop

number for this zone will appear. Press [*] to

continue.

20 LOOP NUMBER

If the sensor's serial number has not been

"enrolled," the serial number can be enrolled now by

entering 1, or it can be enrolled later by using the

ÒSerial Number Enrolling/DeletingÒ menu (see next

section). Enter 0 if serial number will be enrolled

later. The summary screen will then appear (see

summary screen description on previous page).

20 LEARN S/N ?

1=YES 0=NO

If enrolling the serial number now (entering 1 at the

last prompt), this prompt appears. You can enroll

transmitter serial numbers using either of two

methods.

20 INPUT S/N : L

A000-0000: 1

A. Fault the transmitter two times. The keypad will

beep twice when it hears each transmission.

When enrolling transmitters assigned as BR

input type (e.g. 5802, 5802CP), allow 8 seconds

between transmissions.

B. Enter the serial number directly from the keypad.

The serial number is located on the bar code

label of the transmitter. Simply enter the 7-digit

number following the letter "A" then press [*].

Enter the appropriate loop number for the zone

being programmed and press [*].

When the serial number has been successfully

enrolled, its number appears in the display. A typical

display is shown below:

20 PROG AS RF:1

A001-3078:1

Press [*] to continue. The summary screen will then

appear (see summary screen description on

previous page).

Ð 57 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Serial Number

Enrolling/Deleting

To enroll or delete a device's serial number, enter 1

(yes). Enter 0 to move to the Alpha Programming

menu.

SERIAL # PROG?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter the zone number of the device to be enrolled

or deleted. Press [*] to move to the next prompt.

Enter 00 to quit Serial Number programming.

ENTER ZONE NO.

00=QUIT

If the device for that zone number was not

programmed as a serial number input device in the

Zone Programming menus, a prompt indicating

such will appear. Press [*] to return to the Enter

Zone No. prompt.

If a serial number has already been enrolled for that

device, a summary prompt will appear displaying the

type of device and its serial number. Press [*] to

continue to the Delete S/N prompt.

10 PROG AS RF: 2

A000-5372: 2

Enter 1 to delete the displayed serial numbered

device. Enter 0 if this device should not be deleted.

DELETE S/N?

0=NO, 1=YES

If a serial number for that device has not been

enrolled yet, and if the device assigned to that zone

number has been programmed as a serial number

input device in the Zone Programming menus,

this prompt will appear. Enter the device input type

as follows: 0 = none, 3 = supervised RF transmitter,

4 = unsupervised RF transmitter, 5 = RF button

type, 6 = serial polling loop device. Press [*] to move

to the next prompt.

INPUT TYPE

INPUT = 0 OR 3Ð6

If adding a new serial number device to the system,

this prompt will appear after entering the input type..

Enter 1 to have the system enroll the device's serial

number. To enroll the serial number at a later time but

retain the zone programming information, enter 0. If

0 is entered, a zone summary screen appears

(described later). Press [*] to return to the Enter

Zone No. prompt to enroll another device's serial

number or to exit enroll menus.

LEARN S/N?

0=NO, 1=YES

If 1 was entered at the Learn S/N? prompt, this

screen will appear. The device's serial number can

be manually entered as described in the Zone

Programming section on the previous page, or it can

be automatically enrolled by faulting the device at

least twice (causing 2 transmissions). Two matching

transmissions must be received. The keypad will

beep with each transmission received. Press [*] to

continue.

INPUT S/N:L

Axxx -

xxxx:L

A summary screen will appear if the serial number

was successfully enrolled. Press [*] to continue.

10 PROG AS RF:2

A000-5372:2

A summary screen for the zone programming will

appear showing the zone number, zone type (ZT),

partition assignment (P), report code (RC), and input

device type (IN:L). Press * to continue. The Enter

Zone No. prompt will appear again.

10 ZT P RC IN:L

Ð 58 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alpha Programming

If using an alpha keypad in the system, a user friendly English language

description/location of all protection zones, partitions' keypad panics, polling loop

short and RF receiver supervision faults can be programmed into the system.

Each description can be composed of a combination of words (up to a maximum

of 3) that are selected from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in memory, and any

word can have an "s" or " 's " added to it. In addition, up to 20 installer-defined

words can be added to those already in memory. Thus, when an alarm or trouble

occurs in a zone, an appropriate description for the location of that zone will be

displayed at the keypad. An installer's message can also be programmed for each

partition which will be displayed when the system is "Ready" (ex. THE

PETERSON's).

To program alpha descriptors, enter Programming mode, then press #93 to

display "ZONE PROG?". Press 0 (NO) twice to display "ALPHA PROG?". Press 1

to enter ALPHA PROGRAMMING mode. There are 6 sub-menu selections that

will be displayed one at a time. Press 1 to select the mode desired. Press 0 to

display the next mode available. The alpha sub menu selections are:

ZONE DESCRIP.?

for entering zone descriptors.

DEFAULT SCREEN? for creating custom message; displayed when system

ready

CUSTOM WORD?

PART DESCRIP?

for creating custom words for use in descriptors.

for creating 4-character partition names.

EXIT EDIT MODE? Press 1 to exit back to #93 Menu Mode.

Entering Zone Descriptors

1. Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode.

The keypad keys perform the following functions:

[3] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order.

[1] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in descending alphabetical order.

[2] Adds or removes an "s" or " 's " to a vocabulary word.

[6] Toggles between alphabet and actual word list; used to accept entries.

[8] Saves the zone description in the system's memory.

[#] # plus zone number will display the description for that zone.

2. Key *01 to begin entering the description for zone 1, (key *02 for zone 2,

*03 for zone 3 etc.). The following will be displayed: * ZN 01 A

Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number, and

that the zone number is automatically included with the description.

3. One of two methods of entering the words can now be used (assume, for

example that the desired description for zone 1 is BACK DOOR) :

a) Press [#] followed by the 3 digit number of the first word from the fixed

dictionary shown later in this section (e.g., [0][1][3] for BACK). Press [6]

in order to save the word and proceed, or...

b) Select the first letter of the desired description (note that "A" is already

displayed). Use key [3] to advance through the alphabet and key [1] to go

backward. For example, assume the desired description for zone 1 is

BACK DOOR. Press key [3] repeatedly until "B" appears, then press key

[6] to display the first available word beginning with B. Repeatedly press

key [3] to advance through the available words until the word BACK is

displayed. Press key [1] to move backward through the word list.

To add an "s" or " 's ", press the [2] key. The first depression adds an "s",

the second depression adds an " 's ", the third depression displays no

character (to erase the character), the fourth depression adds an "s", etc.

To accept the word, press the [6] key, which toggles back to alphabet list.

4. For selection of the next word (DOOR), repeat step 3, but press key [3] until

the desired first letter of the next word appears (in this example, "D"). Then

press key [6] to display the first available word beginning with "D". Press key

[3] repeatedly until the desired word (DOOR) appears. To accept the word,

press the [6] key, which again toggles back to alphabet list.

Ð 59 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering Zone

Descriptors

(continued)

5. When all desired words have been entered, press key [8] to store the

description in memory.

6. To review the zone descriptions, key [#] plus zone number (e.g., #01). To

edit zone descriptions, key [*] plus zone number (e.g., *01)

7. To exit the zone description mode, key 00.

NOTE: Alpha descriptor entry can be entered locally at the alpha keypad or

remotely using AdemcoÕs V-Link downloading software (Rev. 4 or

higher) or AdemcoÕs Compass Windows downloading software..

Adding Custom Words

Up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to the built-in vocabulary. Each of

the 20 "words" can actually consist of several words, but bear in mind that a

maximum of 10 characters can be used for each word string.

NOTE: The phone module can be programmed to annunciate

substitute custom words, if desired. If not programmed for

substitutes, the phone module will only annunciate the zone

number whenever the alpha keypad displays a custom word

1. Select CUSTOM WORD mode. The keys perform the following functions:

[3] Advances through alphabet in ascending order.

[1] Advances through alphabet in descending order.

[6] Selects desired letter; moves the cursor 1 space right.

[4] Moves the cursor one space to the left.

[7] Inserts a space at the cursor location, erasing any character at that

location.

[8] Saves the new word in the system's memory.

[*] Returns to description entry mode.

2. Key the number of the custom word or word string to be created (01-20). For

example, if you are creating the first word (or word string), enter 01; when

creating the second word, enter 02, and so on. A cursor will now appear at

the beginning of the second line.

3. One of two methods of entering the custom word's characters can now be

used (refer to the CHARACTER LIST of letters, numbers, and symbols on

the next page):

a) Press the [#] key, followed by the two digit entry for the first letter you

would like to display (e.g., [6][5] for "A"), or...

b) Use the [3] key to advance through the list of symbols, numbers, and

letters. Use the [1] key to move back through the list.

When zone descriptors are being entered as described in step 3a the custom

word numbers are 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20 respectively. When being en-

tered as described in step 3b, each word will be found at the end of the group

of words that begin with the same letter as it does.

4. When you have reached the desired character, press the [6] key to select it.

The cursor will then move to the right, in position for the next character.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the desired word (or words). Note that the [4]

key can be used to move the cursor to the left if necessary, and that key [7]

can be used to enter a blank (or to erase an existing character). Each word or

word string cannot exceed 10 characters.

6. Press the [8] key to save the custom word(s) and return to the CUSTOM

WORD? display. The custom word (or string of words) will be automatically

added to the built-in vocabulary at the end of the group of words beginning

with the same letter.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to 19 additional custom words (or word

strings).

8. Key 00 at custom word prompt to exit the zone description programming

mode.

Ð 60 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating Partition

Descriptors

1. Select "Part DESCRIPT." mode. The system will ask for the partition number

desired. Enter the number as a single key.

2. Follow the same procedure as for CUSTOM WORDS, except that partition

descriptors are limited to four (4) characters (ex. WHSE for warehouse).

Creating A Custom

Message Display (Installer's

Message)

Normally, when the system is in the disarmed state, the following display is

present on the Keypad.

DISARMED

READY TO ARM

****

Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer

message for each partition. For example,

DISARMED

on the first line or

****

READY TO ARM on the second line could be replaced by the installation

company name or phone number for service. Note that there are only 16

character spaces on each of the two lines. To create a custom display message,

proceed as follows:

1. Select DEFAULT SCREEN mode. The keypad will ask for the partition

number for this message. Enter the partition number. Press [*] to accept

entry.

The following will appear:

DISARMED

READY TO ARM

****

A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line (over the first "star").

The [6] key is used to move the cursor to the right and the [4] key to move the

cursor to the left. Key [7] may be used to insert spaces or erase existing

characters.

2. For example, to replace the READY TO ARM words with the message:

SERVICE:424-0177, proceed as follows:

Press the [6] key to move the cursor to the right, and continue until the cursor

is positioned over the first location on the second line.

Press the [3] key to advance through the alphabet to the first desired

character (in this case, "S"). Use the [1] key to go backward, when necessary.

When the desired character is reached, press [6]. The cursor will then move

to the next position, ready for entry of the next character (in this example,

"E"). When the cursor reaches a position over an existing character, pressing

the [3] or [1] key will advance or back up from that character in the alphabet.

Proceed in this manner until all characters in the message have been

entered.

3. To store this new display message in memory, press the [8] key.

4. The system will ask for a new partition number. Enter 00 to quit or 1Ð2 for a

new partition number.

Ð 61 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALPHA VOCABULARY

(For Entering Alpha Descriptors. To select a word, press [#] followed by the word's 3-digit number.)

Bulleted words in bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285 phone module. If using a

phone module, and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors, the phone module will not provide

annunciation of those words.

NOTE: This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors.

See the vocabulary listed in the RELAY VOICE DESCRIPTORS section when programming relay voice descriptors.

000 (Word Space)

¥ 001 AIR

¥ 002 ALARM

003 ALCOVE

004 ALLEY

005 AMBUSH

¥ 006 AREA

¥ 007 APARTMENT

008 ART

¥ 009 ATTIC

010 AUDIO

011 AUXILIARY

051 DESK

¥ 101 INSIDE

102 INTERIOR

103 INTRUSION

151 POLICE

152 POOL

¥ 153 POWER

202 TRANSMITTER

203 TRAP

¥ 052 DETECTOR

¥ 053 DINING

054 DISCRIMINATOR

055 DISPLAY

056 DOCK

¥ 057 DOOR

058 DORMER

¥ 059 DOWN

¥ 060 DOWNSTAIRS

061 DRAWER

¥ 062 DRIVEWAY

063 DRUG

204 ULTRA

¥ 205 UP

¥ 206 UPPER

¥ 207 UPSTAIRS

¥ 208 UTILITY

209 VALVE

210 VAULT

211 VIBRATION

212 VOLTAGE

104 JEWELRY

¥ 105 KITCHEN

154 QUAD

155 RADIO

¥ 156 REAR

157 RECREATION

158 REFRIG

159 REFRIGERATION

160 R F

¥ 161 RIGHT

¥ 162 ROOM

163 ROOF

¥ 106 LAUNDRY

¥ 107 LEFT

108 LEVEL

¥ 109 LIBRARY

¥ 110 LIGHT

111 LINE

112 LIQUOR

¥ 113 LIVING

¥ 114 LOADING

115 LOCK

116 LOOP

117 LOW

¥ 118 LOWER

213 WALL

214 WAREHOUSE

215 WASH

¥ 216 WEST

¥ 217 WINDOW

218 WINE

¥ 219 WING

220 WIRELESS

221 WORK

¥ 012 BABY

¥ 013 BACK

¥ 014 BAR

¥ 064 DUCT

164 SAFE

¥ 065 EAST

165 SCREEN

166 SENSOR

¥ 167 SERVICE

¥ 168 SHED

169 SHOCK

¥ 170 SHOP

171 SHORT

172 SHOW

015 BARN

066 ELECTRIC

067 EMERGENCY

068 ENTRY

¥ 069 EQUIPMENT

070 EXECUTIVE

¥ 071 EXIT

¥ 016 BASEMENT

¥ 017 BATHROOM

¥ 018 BED

¥ 019 BEDROOM

020 BELL

¥ 021 BLOWER

¥ 022 BOILER

023 BOTTOM

024 BOX

025 BREAK

¥ 026 BUILDING

027 BURNER

¥ 119 MACHINE

120 MAGNETIC

121 MAIDS

122 MAIN

¥ 123 MASTER

124 MAT

¥ 125 MEDICAL

126 MEDICINE

127 MICROWAVE

128 MONEY

129 MONITOR

¥ 130 MOTHERS

¥ 131 MOTION

132 MOTOR

222 XMITTER

223 YARD

072 EXTERIOR

¥ 073 FACTORY

074 FAILURE

075 FAMILY

¥ 076 FATHERS

¥ 077 FENCE

078 FILE

¥ 173 SIDE

174 SKYLIGHT

175 SLIDING

¥ 176 SMOKE

177 SONIC

¥ 178 SONS

¥ 179 SOUTH

180 SPRINKLER

181 STAMP

¥ 182 STATION

183 STEREO

184 STORE

¥ 185 STORAGE

186 STORY

187 STRESS

188 STRIKE

189 SUMP

190 SUPERVISED

191 SUPERVISION

192 SWIMMING

193 SWITCH

224 ZONE (No.)

¥ 225 ZONE

226 0

227 1

228 1ST

229 2

230 2ND

231 3

232 3RD

233 4

234 4TH

235 5

236 5TH

237 6

238 6TH

239 7

240 7TH

241 8

028 CABINET

¥ 029 CALL

030 CAMERA

031 CAR

032 CASE

033 CASH

034 CCTV

035 CEILING

036 CELLAR

¥ 037 CENTRAL

038 CIRCUIT

039 CLIP

¥ 040 CLOSED

041 COIN

042 COLD

¥ 079 FIRE

¥ 080 FLOOR

081 FLOW

082 FOIL

¥ 083 FOYER

084 FREEZER

¥ 085 FRONT

086 FUR

133 MUD

¥ 134 NORTH

135 NURSERY

087 FURNACE

¥ 136 OFFICE

137 OIL

088 GALLERY

¥ 089 GARAGE

¥ 090 GAS

¥ 138 OPEN

139 OPENING

¥ 140 OUTSIDE

141 OVERFLOW

142 OVERHEAD

091 GATE

¥ 092 GLASS

093 GUEST

094 GUN

242 8TH

243 9

244 9TH

250 Custom Word 1

043 COATROOM

044 COLLECTION

045 COMBUSTION

¥ 046 COMPUTER

047 CONTACT

143 PAINTING

¥ 144 PANIC

145 PASSIVE

¥ 146 PATIO

147 PERIMETER

¥ 148 PHONE

149 PHOTO

194 TAMPER

195 TAPE

196 TELCO

197 TELEPHONE

198 TELLER

¥ 199 TEMPERATURE

200 THERMOSTAT

¥ 201 TOOL

¥ 095 HALL

¥ 096 HEAT

097 HIGH

098 HOLDUP

099 HOUSE

269 Custom Word 20

¥ 048 DAUGHTERS

049 DELAYED

¥ 050 DEN

100 INFRARED

150 POINT

*Note: This factory-provided vocabulary of words is subject to change.

CHARACTER (ASCII) CHART (For Adding Custom Words)

32 (space)

;

(

)

Ð 62 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This menu is used to program keypads, receivers and relay modules.

From Data Field Programming mode, press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?". Press

0 repeatedly to display "DEVICE PROG?".

Device Programming

Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

DEVICE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO

Enter the 2-digit device number as set by the

DEVICE ADDRESS

device's DIP switches (01-15). Press [*] to accept

entry. Enter 00 to return to the main menu. See

01-15, 00 = QUIT

NOTE below.

Select the type of addressable device as follows:

00 = device not used

01 = alpha keypad (6139)

DEVICE TYPE

02 = fixed word keypad (6128, 6137)

03 = RF receiver (4281/5881)

04 = output device (4204 relay module)

05 = phone module (4285)

07 = VIM voice interface module (refer to VIM

menu prompts on the following page if this

device type is selected)

08 = 6139AV 2-way voice/alpha keypads

Press [*] to accept entry.

If device type 03 (RF receiver) is selected, this

RF EXPANDER

prompt will appear. Enter the 2-digit house ID (00-31)

HOUSE ID XX

If device type 05 (phone module) is selected, this

MODULE PARTITION?

prompt will appear. Enter the partition number 1-2 in

which the phone module is located.

If device type 08 (2-way voice keypad) is selected,

VOICE KEYPAD NO.

enter the voice keypadÕs number. The voice

01-15

keypads should be numbered in order, starting from

01. For example, if it is the first voice keypad, enter

01; if it is the second, enter 02, etc. This number is

used by the central station operator to locate and

communicate with the premises in case of an

emergency. 01-06 is recommended. Press [*] to

accept entry.

If device type 01, 02 or 08 was selected this prompt

CONSOLE PART.

will appear. Enter the addressable device's default

partition number (01 to maximum number of

partitions programmed for system in field 2*00). This

is the primary partition for which the device is

intended to be used. Press [*] to accept entry.

If device type 01, 02 or 08 was selected this prompt

SOUND OPTION

will appear. Addressable keypads can be individually

programmed to suppress arm/disarm beeps,

entry/exit beeps and chime mode beeps. This helps

prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in

other areas of the premises.

Enter a number 00-03 for the keypad sounding

suppression options desired for the keypad as

follows:

00 = no suppression.

01 = suppress arm/disarm & entry/exit beeps.

02 = suppress chime mode beeps only.

03 = suppress arm/disarm, entry/exit and chime

mode beeps.

The screen will display the next device number to be

programmed. Press 00 to exit Menu Mode.

NOTE: Keypad address 00 will always be set to an alpha keypad with no sounder

suppression options.

Ð 63 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VIM Voice Interface

Module Prompts

If device type 7 (VIM) is selected, the following prompts will appear.

Enter the partition number as follows:

VIM PARTITION?

0 = Automatic Mode, which means that 2-way

voice activates only in the partition in which

the alarm occurred. (maximum of six

6139AV keypads per system)

NOTE: The VIM reports

supervisory faults as

zone 93. Make sure to

program a response

type (trouble = response

type 05) and report code

to zone 93 using #93

Menu Mode - ZONE

1 = Partition 1 Only, which means 2-way voice

activates in partition 1 only and only upon

alarms occurring in partition 1. (maximum of

six 6139AV keypads per partition)

2 = Partition 2 Only, which means 2-way voice

activates in partition 2 only and only upon

alarms occurring in partition 2. (maximum of

six 6139AV keypads per partition)

PROGRAMMING.

3 = All Mode, which means 2-way voice

activates in all partitions upon alarms in any

partition. In this mode, a maximum of six

6139AV keypads can be used in the

system and there can be no duplicate Voice

keypad numbers between the partitions.

Press [*] to accept entry.

At the end of this timeout, the system automatically

ends a 2-way voice session. Enter the maximum 2-

way voice session timeout as follows:

0 = 5 minutes (default)

MAX 2WAY T.O.

1 = 10 minutes

2 = 15 minutes (typical)

3 = no timeout (used when testing the system)

Press [*] to accept entry.

This prompt allows chime and alarm sounds to be

turned on or off in partitions other than the one in

which a 2-way voice session is active as follows:

0 = Off, do not sound chimes or alarms in other

partitions during a 2-way voice session

1 = On, do allow chimes and alarm sounds to

occur in other partitions during a 2-way

voice session, except if VIM Partition is set

to "3" ALL mode.

CHIME OTHERS

Press [*] to accept entry.

If enabled, this option displays the VIM mode status

at the keypad (e.g., LISTEN MODE), which can be

helpful when testing the system. Enter 1 to select.

Enter 0 if not desired. Press [*] to accept entry.

NOTE: Panic zones (95, 96 and 99) will not display

2-way voice mode messages regardless of whether

VIM TEXT is enabled.

VIM TEXT?

This option, if selected, allows the VIM to Òlisten-inÓ

in the event of the system's AC loss (it then operates

using the backup battery power). This is recom-

mended for installations where life support devices

are used, such as a dialysis machine. Enter 1 to

select. Enter 0 if operation upon power failure is not

desired. Press [*] to accept entry.

VIM AC LOSS

If enabled, this option allows the Central Station to

call back and initiate 2-way voice communication

within 5 minutes after an alarm report is sent.

Otherwise, a ÒListen in to FollowÓ message (Contact

ID event code Ò606Ó) is sent at the end of the report

to initiate 2-way voice communication immediately.

AUTO CALL BACK

Ð 64 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This is recommended if dual reporting is selected, to

allow the report to be sent to primary and secondary

numbers.

The display returns to the DEVICE ADDRESS

prompt for entry of the next device or exit from

DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

Relay Programming

The VISTA-40 supports up to eight (8) X-10 and/or relay outputs. The X-10

interface is made via a 4300 plug-in transformer. Relay and X-10 devices are

interchangeable in functionality. Once a device is programmed into the system,

there is no distinction between an X-10 or a relay output device.

These relay output actions

are performed in

response to a

Relays can be used to perform many different function and actions. Each relay

must be programmed to begin one of four types of ACTIONS at a designated

START event and end that ACTION at a designated STOP event.

programmed condition.

Action (A)

The "ACTION" of a relay is the way in which the relay will respond when activated

by the "START" event. There are 4 different choices of actions:

1) CLOSE for 2 Seconds....The relay will activate for 2 seconds then reset.

Because the relay resets on its own, "STOP" programming is not necessary

2) CLOSE....The relay will activate and remain activated until it is told to

deactivate by the "STOP" programming.

3) PULSE ON and OFF....The relay will pulse (intermittent activation) until it

is told to deactivate by the "STOP" programming.

4) No Response....Relay is not used.

START

The "START" programming determines when and under what conditions the

relay will activate. There are 3 parts that must be programmed; Event, Zone List,

and Zone type/System Operation. Each part is described below.

1) EVENT (EV)....The "EVENT" instructs the relay what condition must occur

to the zone(s) programmed into the "ZONE LIST" in order to activate the

relay. The "EVENT" and "ZONE LIST" work together. There are 5 different

choices of events:

ALARM....An alarm condition occurring on any zone in the zone list will

activate the relay.

FAULT....A fault condition (whether control is armed or disarmed) on any

zone in the zone list will activate the relay.

TROUBLE....A trouble condition occurring on any zone in the zone list will

activate the relay. (A trouble condition can only occur on fire and

day/night zones).

NOT USED....Use when an "EVENT" is not needed. If a "ZONE LIST" is not

being used because a "ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION" is, it is not

necessary to use an "EVENT" or a "ZONE LIST".

2) ZONE LIST (ZL)....A "ZONE LIST" is a list of zones selected by the

installer via menu selection after relay programming is completed. When an

event occurs as assigned by "EVENT" on any zone within that list, the relay

will activate as selected in "ACTION". In this way many zones can be assigned

to a single event very easily. For example: you may wish a relay to activate

(perhaps to activate a strobe to get a visual indication) whenever one zone of

a group of zones is faulted.

3) ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT)....Instead of using a "ZONE

LIST" and "EVENT", a specific zone response type or action can be selected

to activate the relay. If a specific zone response type is chosen, any zone of

that type going into alarm, trouble, or fault will cause the relay to activate as

selected in "ACTION". Any zone of that type that restores will deactivate the

relay. If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the

relay to activate as selected in "ACTION".

Ð 65 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following is a list of choices for (ZT):

CHOICES FOR ZONE

TYPES:

00 = No Response (Not Used)

01 = Entry/Exit #1

02 = Entry/exit #2

CHOICES FOR SYSTEM OPERATION:

20 = Arming-Stay (5800 RF)

21 = Arming-Away (5800 RF)

22 = Disarming (Code+Off) (5800 RF)

31 = End of Exit Time

32 = Start of Entry Time

33 = Any Burglary Alarm

34 = Code + # + 71 Key Entry

35 = Code + # + 72 Key Entry

36 = At Bell Timeout **

37 = 2 Times Bell Timeout**

38 = Chime

03 = Perimeter

04 = Interior Follower

05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night

06 = 24 Hr Silent

07 = 24 Hr Audible

08 = 24 Hr Aux

09 = Fire Alarm or Trouble

10 = Interior w/Delay

23 = No alarm response

39 = Any Fire Alarm

40 = Bypassing

41 = AC Power Fail

42 = System Battery Low

43 = Communication failure

44 = RF low battery

45 = Polling loop failure

47 = Keypad failure

51 = RF receiver failure

52 = kissoff

54 = fire zone reset

55 = disarm + 1 minute

56 = XX minutes (enter XX in field 1*74; stop

condition only)

57 = YY seconds (enter YY in field 1*75; stop

condition only)

58 = Duress

60 = Select only if a non-Ademco AAV unit is

being used; also select for Start and Stop

if a 4204 relay module is being used.

64 = VIM Fail

65 = VIM Active

66 = VIM Inactive

** Or at Disarming, whichever occurs earlier

STOP

The "STOP" programming determines when and under what conditions the relay

will deactivate. The following items can be programmed: Restore Zone List, Zone

type/System Operation, and Partition.

1) RESTORE ZONE LIST (ZL)....If a "RESTORE ZONE LIST" is used, the

relay action will deactivate when all the zones in that list restore from a

previous fault or alarm condition. This will occur regardless of what is

programmed to start the relay, therefore, a "RESTORE ZONE LIST" would

normally only be used when a "ZONE LIST" is used to start the relay.

2) ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT)....Instead of using a

"RESTORE ZONE LIST" , a specific zone response type or action can be

selected to deactivate the relay. If a specific zone response type is chosen,

any zone of that type that restores from a previous alarm, trouble, or fault

condition will cause the relay to deactivate. If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is

chosen, that operation will cause the relay to deactivate.

Relay Programming

Menus

From #93 Menu Mode, select Relay Programming Menu.

Press [*] to advance to next screen. Press # to backup to previous screen.

Enter the relay (output device) identification number

ENTER RELAY NO.

1-8. This is a reference number only, for

(00=QUIT) 01

identification purposes. The actual module address

and relay number on the module are programmed in

the last two prompts.

Ð 66 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The keypad will display a summary START screen.

The keypad displays a summary STOP screen.

02 A EV ZL ZT P

STT 0 0 00

02 A EV ZL ZT P

STOP 0 0 0 00

Enter the desired relay action as follows:

0=not used; 1=closed for 2 secs.; 2=stay closed;

3=pulse on/off (temporal pulse).

NOTE: 4204 Relay Module

must be rev. "V3" or higher to

activate temporal pulsing.

02 RELAY ACTION

NO RESPONSE

Note: The 4204 relay must have ÒV3Ó later installed

to activate temporal pulse.

Enter the event code to start the relay action as

follows: 0=not used; 1=alarm; 2=fault; 3=trouble;

4=restore

02 START EVENT

NOT USED

If a zone list is being used to start this relay action,

enter the zone list number 1-4. If a zone list is not

being used, enter 0.

02 START: ZN LIST

NO LIST

If a zone type/system operation is being used to start

the relay action, enter the 2-digit Zone Type/System

Operation number from the list shown earlier in the

RELAY PROGRAMMING section.

02 START: ZN TYPE

Enter 0 for any partition. Enter 1-2 for specific

partition number.

02 START PART

If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action,

enter the zone list number 1-4. If a zone list is not

being used, enter 0.

02 STOP: ZN LIST

NO LIST

If a zone type/system operation is being used to stop

the relay action, enter the 2-digit Zone Type/System

Operation number from the list shown earlier in the

RELAY PROGRAMMING section.

02 STOP: ZN TYPE

Enter 0 for any partition. Enter 1-2 for specific

partition number.

02 STOP PART

The system may have some devices which are not

intended to be under end user control, such as

relays activating fire doors or machinery. Enter 1 if

the end user will be restricted from accessing this

relay group.

RESTRICTION

1=YES 0=NO

Enter 1 for relays. Enter 2 for X-10 devices.

RELAY TYPE

HOUSE CODE

UNIT CODE

For X-10 devices, enter the letter house code. A=0,

B=1, C=2, etc. (00-15)

For X-10 devices, enter the numerical unit code

(01-15)

For relay module (4204) outputs, enter the actual

relay module's address set by its DIP switch (01-15).

Up to 2 modules can be installed in a system.

ECP ADDRESS

For relay module (4204) outputs, enter the specific

relay number on that module (1-4).

The keypad displays the two summary screens again.

MODULE RELAY #

Ð 67 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zone List Programming

After entering all relay menu items, up to four (4) zone lists can be entered by

entering 00 at the ENTER RELAY No. prompt.

Enter the zone list number 1-4.

Enter Zone LIST

00=QUIT 00

Enter each zone to be included in this zone list,

01 Enter Zn Num.

pressing [*] to enter each zone number.

00=QUIT 00

Enter 0 to save the zone list entered. Enter 1 to

delete that zone list.

01 Del Zn LIST?

Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list.

Enter 0 if no changes are necessary. If 1 is entered,

the following screen will appear, otherwise the zone

list no. prompt will reappear.

Enter each zone number to be deleted from the

01 Delete Zone?

0=NO 1=YES

01 Zn to Delete?

00=QUIT 00

zone list, pressing [*] after each number.

This will appear if 00 is pressed at the ENTER ZONE

LIST prompt. Enter the zone list number that you

wish to view.

View Zn LIST

00=QUIT 00

Press [*] to scroll through all zones in that list. Enter

00 to quit.

XX ASSIGNED ZONE

00=QUIT 00

Programming Relays for

Silencing of External

Sounders When Using the

VIM

The system can be programmed to silence external sounders during a 2-way

voice session (VIM active) by using two relays connected in series. An example

shows relays 1 and 2 of the Relay Module connected as shown in the diagram

below. Program the relay that controls the bell/siren (#1) as usual and the other

relay (#2) as shown below. This programming enables the sounders when the

VIM is not active and disables the sounders when the VIM is active.

Ex. Relay #2 programming:

Enter the relay action as 2 (stay closed).

02 RELAY ACTION

STAY CLOSED

Enter start and stop events as 1 (alarm).

Enter 0 (not used) for start and stop zone list.

Enter start zone type 65 (VIM Active).

Enter stop zone type 66 (VIM Inactive).

02 START EVENT

ALARM

02 START: ZN LIST

NOT USED

02 START: ZN TYPE

VIM ACTIVE

02 STOP: ZN TYPE

VIM INACTIVE

4204

RELAY MODULE

RELAY # 2

BELL

RELAY # 1

TO CONTROL'S

KEYPAD TERMINALS

SIREN

Ð 68 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming The Vim For

Relay Triggering On

Supervision Fault

To program the system to trigger a relay upon an VIM fault, use the Relay

Programming Menu (as described earlier) but enter the following values at the

appropriate prompts. When programmed, the relay activates upon VIM failure and

deactivates when the operation of the VIM is restored.

Enter 3 (trouble) as the event code to start the relay

action.

02 START EVENT

TROUBLE

Enter the start zone type code 64 (VIM Fail).

02 START: ZN TYPE

Program the other Relay Programming prompts as you normally would.

Relay Voice Descriptors

For each of the 8 relays/X-10 modules used in the system, a voice descriptor can

be programmed. This descriptor will be annunciated by the phone module when

performing the #70 relay commands via telephone.

Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice

descriptor vocabulary list shown below. Important: The index numbers from this

vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice descriptors only. For normal system

voice annunciation (e.g., alarms, troubles, status), use the highlighted words in

the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha programming section.

Press 1 to program voice descriptors for relays.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=NO

1=YES

Enter the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number (01-08)

for the relay desired, or enter 00 to quit relay voice

descriptor programming mode. Press [*] to accept

entry.

ENTER RELAY NO.

00=QUIT 01

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the first word of the relay

descriptor phrase. Press [*] to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d1

01 ENTER DESC d2

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the second word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If second word is not

desired, press 000. Press [*] to accept entry.

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the third word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If third word is not desired,

press 000. Press [*] to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d3

The ENTER RELAY NO. prompt will appear. Enter

the next relay number to be programmed, or enter

00 to quit.

Ð 69 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary

Word

Index Word

Index

Air....................116 Daughter's .......208 Garage.............023 Off...................011 South ..............155

Alarm ...............255 Den .................052 Gas..................138 Office...............147 Stairs ...............006

And .................067 Detector...........128 Glass................139 On...................058 Station.............156

Apartment........117 Device .............060

One.................070 Storage............157

Appliances.......161 Dim..................163 Hall ..................050 Open...............148 Sun .................154

Area.................118 Dining..............031 Heat.................010 Outside............210 System ............062

Attic.................119 Door ................016

Down...............008 Inside...............209 Panic ...............013 Temperature ....158

Baby................120 Downstairs .......184 Partition ...........090 Third................159

Back ................121 Driveway ..........130 Kitchen............022 Patio................149 Three...............072

Bar...................122 Duct.................131

Basement ........021

Phone .............061 Tool.................213

Laundry ...........140 Power..............063 Two .................071

Bathroom.........051 East.................132 Left..................027 Pump...............166

Battery.............053 Eight................077 Library..............141

Up ...................025

Bed .................092 Eighth..............221 Light................019 Rear ................088 Upper ..............187

Bedroom..........015 Equipment.......133 Living...............030 Right................028 Upstairs............183

Blower .............123 Exit..................004 Loading ...........142 Room...............018 Utility................185

Boiler...............124

Bright...............162 Factory.............134

Lower ..............094

's .....................007 West................215

Building ...........125 Father's............211 Machine...........143 Second............056 Window............017

Burglary ...........039 Fence..............135 Master..............144 Service ............150 Wing................216

Fifth.................218 Medical ............014 Seven..............076

Call ..................009 Fire..................040 Mother's...........212 Seventh...........220 Zero.................069

Central.............089 First .................136 Motion .............145 Shed ...............151 Zone................002

Chime..............054 Five .................074

Shop ...............152

Closed.............126 Floor................029 Nine.................078 Side.................153

Computer.........127 Four.................073 Ninth................222 Six...................075

Console...........066 Fourth..............217 No ...................165 Sixth................219

Foyer...............137 North ...............146 Smoke.............024

Front................087 Not ..................012 Son's...............223

Custom Word Voice

Substitutes

For each of the 20 custom alpha display words that can be programmed, a

substitute phone module word can be assigned. This substitute word will be

announced by the phone module in place of the custom word that is displayed on

the alpha keypad. For example, an alarm display for "John's bedroom" could be

annunciated, "son's bedroom," since there is no annunciation for the custom

word "John." If a substitute word is not assigned, the phone module will be silent

for that part of the announcement for which a custom alpha word exists.

If substitute words for the phone module are

CUSTOM INDEX #?

desired, enter 1 at this prompt.

0=NO

1=YES

Enter the custom word number (01--20) for which a

voice substitute is desired. Enter 00 to quit this

programming mode. Press [*] to accept entry.

CUSTOM WORD NO.

00=QUIT

Enter the 3-digit substitute word index number from

the relay voice descriptor and custom word

substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice

Descriptors section. Press [*] to accept entry. The

"CUSTOM WORD NO." prompt appears. Enter the

next custom word number or enter 00 to quit.

01 ENTER INDEX #

Ð 70 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5. SYSTEM COMMUNICATION

COMMUNICATION FORMATS

Split/Dual Reporting

Dual reporting (*51) sends all reports to both primary and secondary phone

numbers. Split reporting allows reports to be divided between the phone numbers

according to the field's (1*34) selections. Split/Dual reporting can be selected by

enabling dual reporting and enabling one of the split reporting options in field

1*34. If option [1] is selected, all alarms, alarm restores and cancel reports will go to

both phone numbers, while all other reports will go to the secondary phone

number. If [2] is selected, open/close and test messages will go to both phone

numbers, while all other reports will go to the primary phone number. Following are

the Split/Dual Reporting options:

Reporting

Format

Field Number

*5 1

1*3 4 Phone #

Reports

Dual

Split

- - - - - - - -

All reports to both numbers

Primary

Secondary

alarms, restores, cancel

open/close, test , troubles

Primary

Secondary

alarms, restores, troubles

open/close, test

Split/Dual

Primary

Secondary

alarm, restores & cancel

alarms, restores, troubles,

open/close, test

Primary

Secondary

alarms, restores, troubles

alarms, restores,

open/close, test

NOTE: 2-way audio test (code + #65) always routes to the primary phone

number regardless of the programming of fields *51 and 1*34.

If in DUAL/SPLIT reporting mode and 2-way AUTO CALLBACK is disabled, the

report will not go to the secondary phone number until the 2-way session has

ended. To allow the secondary phone to receive reports immediately after the

primary phone, enable AUTO CALLBACK mode in VIM programming. This will

prevent the sending of the Òlisten in to followÓ message (606), allowing the report

to go to the secondary phone number. 2-way voice can then be initiated by

calling back within 5 minutes and entering the correct audio ID number.

Ademco Low Speed

ADEMCO LOW SPEED is a pulsed format which responds to a 1400 Hz

handshake and kiss-off, and transmits data with 1900Hz pulse tones @ 10

pulses per second (pps). A typical message consists of two rounds which must

be verified by the receiver. A complete standard report consists of either a 3 or 4-

digit account number followed by a 1-digit alarm code. Though 2 rounds are sent,

only the valid report is displayed.

In expanded reporting, two messages are sent, two rounds per message, the first

being the account number and alarm code, the second being the zone ID code to

which the alarm was assigned. A complete expanded report consists of a 3 or 4-

digit account number followed by a 1-digit alarm code, then the alarm code is

repeated, followed by the channel number.

EX. Standard:

CCC(C) E where: CCC(C) = account number

E = event code

Expanded: CCC(C) E

EEE(E) Z

Z = zone ID code

Sescoa/Radionics

4+2 Reporting

Standard and expanded reporting in the SESCOA/RADIONICS format is virtually

the same as ADEMCO Low Speed except for the following:

1. The handshake and kiss-off frequency is 2300 Hz.

2. The data is transmitted with 1800 Hz pulse tones.

3. The rate of transmission is 20 pps.

A 4+2 report consists of a 4-digit account number and a 2-digit alarm code, or

event code. 4+2 reports can be accomplished either in ADEMCO Low Speed (10

pps), or SESCOA/RADIONICS (20 pps) format.

Ð 71 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In 4+2 reporting a unique 2-digit code for each zone is reported. A 4-digit

account number followed by a 2-digit code is sent, where the first digit is the

actual event, such as in ALARM, RESTORE, or TROUBLE, etc., and the second

digit of the code represents the "zone" where the event occurred. (but not

necessarily the actual zone number). Each code in itself is unique to a specific

zone. If desired, the actual zone number can be reported by entering the

corresponding 2-digit zone number (ex. zone 1= [0] [1]; zone 63= [6] [3]). A

report might appear as:

1 2 3 4 5 9 ("5 9" might be a unique "TROUBLE RESTORE, ZONE 25).

4+2 Express

ADEMCO's Express format provides the same information as the 4+2 format, but

with three differences:

1. The data is transmitted in DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, known as

"TouchTone", at the rate of 10 characters per second). This greatly

decreases the time it takes a report to go through to central station. An

average 4+2 Low Speed report might take as long as 20 seconds to

complete its report, but 4+2 Express takes under 3 seconds.

2. Two message rounds are eliminated by the use of a checksum digit. Instead

of the communicator sending 2 rounds per report, it sends only 1 round with

a checksum digit at the end. Doing this also helps in decreasing the time it

takes for a report to be sent.

3. The handshake frequency is 1400 Hz followed by 2300 Hz, and the kissoff

frequency is 1400 Hz.

Ademco High Speed

Reporting

ADEMCO's High Speed format transmits data in DTMF at a rate of 10 characters

per second. The handshake frequency is 1400 Hz followed by 2300 Hz, and the

kissoff frequency is 1400 Hz. The message contains 13 digits as follows: A 4-

digit account number + eight channels of zone information (1-8 or duress plus

9-15) + one status channel, which identifies the type of events being reported in

the eight zone locations. A typical High Speed report will be kissed off in under 5

seconds.

Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions:

1 = NEW EVENT

2 = OPENING (Status Channel Always = 2)*

3 = RESTORE

4 = CLOSING (Status Channel Always = 4)*

5 = NORMAL, NO EVENT TO REPORT

6 = PREVIOUSLY REPORTED, NOT YET RESTORED

* NOTE: Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1-9, A-F if Open/Close reporting is

enabled.

The status channel might have one of the following conditions:

1 = DURESS (For Duress Plus Channels 9-15 Only)

2 = OPENING

3 = BYPASS (For Channels 1-8 Only)

4 = CLOSING

5 = TROUBLE (For Channels 1-8 Only)

6 = SYSTEM STATUS:

¥ AC LOSS in Channel 1

¥ LOW BATTERY in Channel 2

¥ PROGRAM TAMPER in Channel 3

¥ POWER ON RESET in Channel 4

7 = NORMAL ALARM STATUS (Chnls 1-8 Only)

9 = TEST REPORT

A typical high speed report may look as follows:

1234 5115 5555 7 (Acct #1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3)

High Speed Format

Limitations

1. When using Ademco high speed, remember there are only 15 channels

available, plus a duress channel. If more than 15 zones are being used, they

will have to share channels.

2. With Ademco High Speed reporting, channels 9-15 cannot report troubles or

bypasses. Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions.

Ð 72 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contact ID Reporting

This is the only format that can identify all 64 protection zones by their unique

zone (Contact) ID numbers, and provides a 1-digit event qualifier and 3-digit,

specifically defined event code which quickly identifies the condition being

reported.

Contact ID reports in DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency @ 10 characters per

second) and responds to a 1400 Hz followed by 2300 Hz handshake, and a 1400

Hz kissoff. This format also uses checksum instead of two message verification. A

complete report takes under 3 seconds.

Contact ID Reporting takes the format: CCCC Q EEE GG ZZZ

where:

CCCC = Customer (subscriber) number.

= Event qualifier, where: E=new event (1) and R= restore (3)

= Event code (3 hexadecimal digits), defined in the table below.

= Partition number.

EEE

ZZZ

= Zone/contact ID number reporting the alarm (001-099), or user

number (001-099) for open/close reports. System status messages

(AC Loss, Walk Test, etc.) contain zeroes in the ZZZ location.

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES

Code Definition

110 Fire Alarm

381 Loss of Supervision - RF

121 Duress

382 Loss of RPM Supervision

383 RPM Sensor Tamper

384 RF Transmitter Low Battery

401 O/C By User

122 Silent Panic

123 Audible Panic

131 Perimeter Burglary

132 Interior Burglary

133 24 Hour Burglary (zone type11 if supported)

134 Entry/Exit Burglary

135 Day/Night Burglary

150 24 Hour Auxiliary

301 AC Loss

403 Power-Up Armed

406 Cancel by User

407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)

408 Quick Arm

409 Keyswitch O/C

411 Call back Requested

441 Armed STAY

302 Low System Battery

305 System Reset

570 Bypass

306 Program Tamper

309 Battery Test Fail

332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble

333 Addressable Device Failure

373 Fire Loop Trouble

380 Trouble (global)

602 Periodic Test

606 AudioAlarmVerificationto follow (AAVÐlisten-in)

607 Walk Test Mode, 2-Way Audio Test

621 Event Log Reset

625 Time/Date Reset

626 Time/date inaccurate

ADVISORY:

Ademco's new Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 64 zones of information, as well as

openings and closings for all 70 users, to central stations equipped with the Ademco 685 receiver using software

level 4.4 or higher. Must be level 4.6 to fully support all new VISTA-40 report codes. 685 software levels below 4.4

cannot support Contact ID reporting. For information regarding updating the 685 receiver, contact the Technical

Support group (see CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT section toward the end of this manual).

NOTE: Contact ID event code Ò606Ó is sent only if a VIM, and at least one 2-way voice keypad is used, and the

AUTO CALLBACK option is disabled. If AUTO CALLBACK option is enabled, then the restriction that

the 685 Rev number must be 4.6 or higher no longer applies, and the 2-way voice feature will work with

ANY central station receiver.

Ð 73 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING

General Information

To help expedite the installation, the system provides 4 different communication

defaults (Low Speed, Ademco Express, Ademco High Speed & Ademco's new

Contact ID). These defaults automatically program industry-standard code

assignments for zones, keypad panics, non-alarm and supervisory conditions,

and can be loaded at any time without affecting non-communication program

fields.

Loading Communication

Defaults

To load a communication default set, do the following:

While in programming mode, first change to the 1*xx set of fields (press *94),

then enter one of the following field numbers to load the communication default

set desired.

NOTE: Default

communication commands

are in second set of

programming fields (fields

1*80, 1*81, 1*82 & 1*83).

TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

PRESS

*80

TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAMMING SET

Low Speed communication defaults

*81

Ademco Express communication defaults

Ademco High Speed communication defaults

Contact ID communication defaults

*82

*83

These defaults load industry standard codes that will suit most of your needs.

Program fields *54-*82 make up the communications portion of the

programming, and can be changed as needed to suit special applications. A

complete list of these default values is provided at the end of this section.

Making Changes To

Communication Fields

If programming communication fields manually to change default values, simply

enter whatever code (3+1, 4+1, 4+2 or Ademco Express) is to be sent for each

zone (including panics, non-alarm codes and supervisory codes). NOTE: Enter

"10" to transmit an "A", which appears as "0" at the receiver.

Report code entries for all zones are grouped into 8 zones per pair of program

fields, with common restore, trouble and bypass codes for every 2 groups (16

zones). Refer to the programming form for clarification.

For 3+1, 4+1, 4+2 and Ademco Express, the first entry is the alarm code and

swinger suppression channel for a standard report. The second entry is the ID

digit for an expanded 3+1 or 4+1 report, or for a 4+2 or Ademco Express report.

If the second digit is 0, only 3+1 or 4+1 (or 4+1 express) non-expanded

messages will be sent.

For Ademco High Speed format, the first digit entry is the channel assignment for

that zone, and the second digit is ignored, if entered. For Contact ID reporting,

the first digit entry (any non zero entry) enables reporting for that zone and

assigns the swinger suppression channel , and the second digit is ignored.

NOTE: Restoral reports for an event will not be sent if the event itself is not

enabled, even if a restore code is programmed for that event.

Swinger Suppression

This feature limits the number of alarm and trouble messages sent on a given

channel during an armed period. Each channel has a separate counter for each

message type (alarm, alarm restore, trouble, trouble restore). When the

programmed swinger suppression value has been exceeded for a particular

message, further messages of that type sent on that channel will be inhibited.

This feature is intended to reduce ÒswingerÓ alarms/troubles from clogging the

central station. To disable swinger suppression, enter 00 in field *84 (must be 00

for UL installations), which allows all alarm and trouble messages to be reported.

Enabling Of Dialer

Reporting By Partition

In order to enable dialer reports for a partition, an account number (fields *32 &

*90) must be programmed for that partition. The Control is shipped with an

account number set for partition 1 only (set to FFFF). Partition 2 has no account

numbers pre-programmed.

In addition, in case of phone line failure, the "COMM. FAIL" message will not be

displayed in partitions which do not have a primary account number programmed.

Ð 74 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING GUIDE

Field #

*46, *48

Low Speed

Contact ID

No effect

High Speed

No effect

Express

No effect

Choose transmission

speed and frequency

*52, *53

Send as either 4+2

or expanded

No effect

*79, *80

*49

Enables alarm restores

Add checksum digit

Enables alarm restores

No effect

Enables alarm restores

Add checksum digit

Enables alarm restores

No effect

*81, *82

Define codes and

selects 4+1 or 4+2

1st digit enables report

if it is non-zero

1st digit enables report

if it is non-zero

Define codes and

selects 4+1 or 4+2

*54, *56, *59, *61,

*64, *66, *69, *71,

*74, *76

Defines alarm event

code

Enables reports

Assigns reporting channel Defines alarm event

for all reports from this zone. code

Enables alarm reporting.

*55, *57, *60

*62, *65, *67,

*70, *72, *75, *77

Defines code and

selects 4+1 or 4+2

No effect

Defines code and

selects 4+1 or 4+2

*58, *63, *68,

*73, *78

event

Enables report and

selects code. Note:

Enables report

Note: Alarm channel

Enables report and selects

1st digit of. the 2-digit

No restores if

event not sent.

must be programmed.

(01-15)

code. NOTE: No restores

if event not sent.

*50

Sescoa/Radionics;

Selects fixed digit time

instead of fixed interdigit.

No effect

NOTES

Note: Low Speed will

not send 3+2 messages.

Zone ID digit is suppressed.

Summary Of Default Consequences

Loading communication defaults results in the following:

Low Speed

(*94*80)

¥ Selects low speed, standard format with no checksum, for both phone numbers.

¥ Assigns the following report codes:

03 for zones 2-47

01 for zones 1 & 48-55 (fire zones)

02 for zones 62,63 (panic transmitter), & 95, 96, 99 (keypad panics)

09 for all alarm restores

¥ Enables all zone type alarm restores.

¥ Disables reporting Troubles, Trouble Restores, Bypass, Bypass Restores for all zones.

ADEMCO

Express

(*94*81)

¥ Selects Ademco express reporting format, with checksum, for both phone numbers.

¥ Report codes for zones 1-64, RF receivers and keypad panics are sent as their

respective zone ID numbers (01-64, 87-91, 95-99), Duress is sent as "DD". Alarm

restore is "E" + 2nd digit.

¥ Enables all zone type alarm restores.

¥ Disables reporting Troubles, Trouble Restores, Bypass, Bypass Restores for all zones.

ADEMCO High

Speed (*94*82)

¥ Selects Ademco High Speed format, with no checksum, for both phone numbers.

¥ Reporting is assigned to the following channels:

Channel 1 for zones 1 & 48-55 (Fire zones)

Channel 2 for zones 2-8

Channel 3 for zones 9-16

Channel 4 for zones 17-31

Channel 5 for zones 32-47 (RF interior zones)

Channel 6 for zones 56-61

Channel 9 for zones 62 & 63 (panic transmitter)

Channel 7 for zone 87 and for 2nd receiver (88 & 89) & polling loop short (97)

Channel 8 for first receiver (90 & 91)

Channels 10, 11 & 12 for keypad panics 95, 96 & 99 respectively

¥ Enables all zone type alarm restores.

¥ Enables Duress to be sent.

¥ Disables reporting Troubles, Trouble Restores, Bypass, Bypass Restores for all zones.

ADEMCO's

Contact ID

(*94*83)

¥ Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers.

¥ Reporting is enabled for all zones.

¥ Enables all zone type alarm restores.

¥ Refer to the SYSTEM COMMUNICATION section for event code definitions.

Ð 75 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

¥ Disables reporting Troubles, Trouble Restores, Bypass, Bypass Restores for all zones.

Ð 76 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT (*94 then *80)

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco Low Speed *51 DUAL REPORTING

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

Ademco Low Speed

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

No checksum

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Radionics

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID

*56 CODE *57 ID

*58

*59 CODE *60 ID

*61 CODE *62 ID

*63

0|1

0|3

0|0

9 0|3

0|0

0|9 Alarm Rst.

17 0|3

18 0|3

19 0|3

20 0|3

0|0

25 0|3

26 0|3

27 0|3

28 0|3

29 0|3

30 0|3

31 0|3

32 0|3

0|0

0|9 Alarm Rst.

10 0|3

11 0|3

12 0|3

13 0|3

14 0|3

15 0|3

16 0|3

0|0

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Trouble

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Bypss Rst. 21 0|3

22 0|3

23 0|3

24 0 3

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68 *69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

33 0|3

34 0|3

35 0|3

36 0|3

37 0|3

38 0|3

39 0|3

40 0|3

0|0

41 0|3

42 0|3

43 0|3

44 0|3

45 0|3

46 0|3

47 0|3

48 0|1

0|0

0|9 Alarm Rst.

49 0|1

50 0|1

51 0|1

52 0|1

0|0

57 0|3

58 0|3

59 0|3

60 0|3

61 0|3

62 0|2

63 0|2

64 0|3

0|0

0|9 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Bypss Rst. 53 0|1

54 0|1

55 0|1

56 0|3

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE CODES

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID

*76 CODE *77 ID

*78

*81

First Digit Second Digit

*82

87 0|7

88 0|7

0|0

89 0|7

90 0|7

91 0|7

Duress 0|2

93 0|7

0|0

0|9 Alarm Rst.

Second digit of each

code applies only to

4+2 or expanded (fields

*52 & *53) formats.

0|0 Trouble

Open

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

Low Battery

Low Bat Res.

AC Loss

AC Restore

Test

97 0|7

95 0|2

96 0|2

99 0|2

0|0 (1 + * or A key)

0|0 (3 + # or C key)

0|0 (* + # or B key)

Power

Cancel

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving transmitter

signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to panel.

87 = 4285 phone module. 93 = VIM fail

Prog. Tamper

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79

ARM STAY & TIME SET REPORT CODES

1*4 0

First Digit

ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

1*4 1

Second Digit

Armed STAY

0|0

*80

ZONE TYPES 9 &10

All enabled

Time/Date set or event log reset

0|0

Ð 77 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT (*94 then *81)

*51 DUAL REPORTING

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco Express

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

No checksum

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Radionics

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*59 CODE *60 ID

*61 CODE *62 ID

*63

*54 CODE *55 ID

*56 CODE *57 ID

*58

17 0|1

18 0|1

19 0|1

20 0|2

21 0|2

22 0|2

23 0|2

24 0|2

0|7

0|8

0|9

1|0

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

25 0|2

26 0|2

27 0|2

28 0|2

29 0|2

30 0|3

31 0|3

32 0|3

0|5

0|6

0|7

0|8

0|9

1|0

0|1

0|2

1|4 Alarm Rst.

1|0

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

0|7

0|8

9 1|0

0|9

1|4 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

10 0|1

11 0|1

12 0|1

13 0|1

14 0|1

15 0|1

16 0|1

1|0

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68 *69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

33 0|3

34 0|3

35 0|3

36 0|3

37 0|3

38 0|3

39 0|3

40 0|4

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

0|7

0|8

0|9

1|0

41 0|4

42 0|4

43 0|4

44 0|4

45 0|4

46 0|4

47 0|4

48 0|4

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

0|7

0|8

1|4 Alarm Rst.

49 0|4

50 0|5

51 0|5

52 0|5

0|9

1|0

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

57 0|5

58 0|5

59 0|5

60 0|6

61 0|6

62 0|6

63 0|6

64 0|6

0|7

0|8

0|9

1|0

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

1|4 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

0|0

Trble Rst.

Bypass

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Bypss Rst. 53 0|5

54 0|5

55 0|5

56 0|5

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE CODES

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID

*76 CODE *77 ID

*78

*81

First Digit Second Digit

*82

87 0|8

88 0|8

0|7

0|8

89 0|8

90 0|9

91 0|9

Duress 1|3

93 0|9

0|9

1|0

0|1

1|3

0|3

0|7

1|4 Alarm Rst.

Second digit of each

code applies only to

4+2 or expanded (fields

*52 & *53) formats.

0|0 Trouble

Open

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

Low Battery

Low Bat Res.

AC Loss

AC Restore

Test

0|0

97 0|9

95 0|9

96 0|9

99 0|9

0|0

0|5 (1 + * or A key)

0|6 (3 + # or C key)

0|9 (* + # or B key)

0|0

Power

0|0

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving transmitter

signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to panel.

87 = 4285 phone module. 93 = VIM fail

Cancel

0|0

Prog. Tamper

0|0

All enabled

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79

ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

*80

ZONE TYPES 9 &10

Ð 78 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARM STAY & TIME SET REPORT CODES

1*4 0

First Digit

1*4 1

Second Digit

Armed STAY

0|0

Time/Date set or event log reset

0|0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH SPEED FORMAT (*94 then *82)

*51 DUAL REPORTING

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco High Speed

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

No checksum

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Radionics

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID

*56 CODE *57 ID

*58

*59 CODE *60 ID

*61 CODE *62 ID

*63

0|1

0|2

0|0

9 0|3

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

17 0|4

18 0|4

19 0|4

20 0|4

0|0

25 0|4

26 0|4

27 0|4

28 0|4

29 0|4

30 0|4

31 0|4

32 0|5

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

10 0|3

11 0|3

12 0|3

13 0|3

14 0|3

15 0|3

16 0|3

0|0

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Trouble

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Bypss Rst. 21 0|4

22 0|4

23 0|4

24 0|4

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

*64 CODE *65 ID

*66 CODE *67 ID

*68

49 0|1

50 0|1

51 0|1

52 0|1

53 0|1

54 0|1

55 0|1

56 0|6

0|0

57 0|6

58 0|6

59 0|6

60 0|6

61 0|6

62 0|9

63 0|9

64 0|6

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

33 0|5

34 0|5

35 0|5

36 0|5

37 0|5

38 0|5

39 0|5

40 0|5

0|0

41 0|5

42 0|5

43 0|5

44 0|5

45 0|5

46 0|5

47 0|5

48 0|1

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID *76 CODE *77 ID *78 SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*81 *82

First Digit Second Digit

87 0|7

88 0|7

0|0

89 0|7

90 0|8

91 0|8

Duress 0|1

93 0|7

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

Second digit of each

code applies only to 4+2

or expanded (fields *52 &

*53) formats.

0|0 Trouble

Open

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

Low Battery

Low Bat Res.

AC Loss

AC Restore

Test

0|0

97 0|7

95 1|0

96 1|1

99 1|2

0|0

0|0 (1 + * or A key)

0|0 (3 + # or C key)

0|0 (* + # or B key)

0|0

Power

0|0

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving transmitter

signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to panel.

87 = 4285 phone module, 93 = VIM fail.

Cancel

0|0

Prog. Tamper

0|0

All enabled

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79

ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

*80

ZONE TYPES 9 &10

Ð 80 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARM STAY & TIME SET REPORT CODES

1*4 0

First Digit

1*4 1

Second Digit

Armed STAY

0|0

Time/Date set or event log reset

0|0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO's CONTACT ID FORMAT (*94 then *83)

*51 DUAL REPORTING

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco Contact ID

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

No checksum

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Radionics

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*59 CODE *60 ID

*61 CODE *62 ID

*63

*54 CODE *55 ID

*56 CODE *57 ID

*58

17 0|2

18 0|3

19 0|4

20 0|5

21 0|6

22 0|7

23 0|8

24 0|9

0|0

25 1|0

26 1|1

27 1|2

28 1|3

29 1|4

30 1|5

31 0|1

32 0|2

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

0|1

0|2

0|3

0|4

0|5

0|6

0|7

0|8

0|0

9 0|9

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

10 1|0

11 1|1

12 1|2

13 1|3

14 1|4

15 1|5

16 0|1

0|0

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

*64 CODE *65 ID

*66 CODE *67 ID

*68

49 0|4

50 0|5

51 0|6

52 0|7

53 0|8

54 0|9

55 1|0

56 1|1

0|0

57 1|2

58 1|3

59 1|4

60 1|5

61 0|1

62 0|2

63 0|3

64 0|4

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

33 0|3

34 0|4

35 0|5

36 0|6

37 0|7

38 0|8

39 0|9

40 1|0

0|0

41 1|1

42 1|2

43 1|3

44 1|4

45 1|5

46 0|1

47 0|2

48 0|3

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

0|0 Trouble

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE CODES

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID

*76 CODE *77 ID

*78

*81

First Digit Second Digit

*82

87 1|2

88 1|3

0|0

89 1|4

90 1|5

91 0|1

Duress 0|2

93 1|2

0|0

0|1 Alarm Rst.

Second digit of each

code applies only to 4+2

or expanded (fields *52 &

*53) formats.

0|0 Trouble

Open

0|0

0|0 Trble Rst.

0|0 Bypass

0|0 Bypss Rst.

Low Battery

Low Bat Res.

AC Loss

AC Restore

Test

0|0

97 0|3

95 0|4

96 0|5

99 0|6

0|0

0|0 (1 + * or A key)

0|0 (3 + # or C key)

0|0 (* + # or B key)

0|0

Power

0|0

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving transmitter

signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to panel.

87 = 4285 phone module. 93 = VIM fail

Cancel

0|0

Prog. Tamper

0|0

All enabled

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79

ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

*80

ZONE TYPES 9 &10

Ð 82 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARM STAY & TIME SET REPORT CODES

1*4 0

First Digit

1*4 1

Second Digit

Armed STAY

0|0

Time/Date set or event log reset

0|0

Ð 83 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6. DOWNLOADING

REMOTE DOWNLOADING

What Is Downloading?

Downloading allows the operator at a remote facility to access, program, and

control the security system over normal telephone lines. Anything that can be

done directly from the keypad can be done remotely, using DOWNLOADING.

UL NOTE: Downloading is not permissible for UL installations.

To Download, the following is required at the remote facility:

1. An IBM PC, or compatible computer with MS DOS 3.1 or higher, to run the

DOWNLOADING program. MS DOS stands for: Microsoft Disk Operating

System.

2. A HAYES 1200 SMARTMODEM (external: level 1.2 or higher; internal: level

1.1 or higher; if these levels cannot be found locally, an external modem can

be purchased from ADEMCO, or contact HAYES for a free update) or HAYES

OPTIMA 24 PLUS FAX96 MODEM. Other brands are not compatible, even if

claimed to be 100% compatible.

3. AdemcoÕs V-Link downloading software (Rev. 4 or higher) or AdemcoÕs

Compass Windows downloading software. This software includes a complete

User's Manual.

Site-initiated Downloading

Telco Hand-off feature allows the technician at the site to call the downloading

facility from the control panel phone line and initiate a site download by keying

Installer or Master Code + # + 1. The control will immediately be on-line with the

modem at the downloading facility. Also, if a local computer has a modem, the

telephone line terminals of the control can be connected to the modem, and a

direct download connection can be established with the new downloader

program.

How Does

Downloading Work?

At the protected premises, the Control panel must be connected to the existing

telephone line (refer to the PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS section). No

programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial installation.

However, it is recommended that factory defaults be loaded first by keying *97.

To download from a remote facility, do the following:

1. Enter the installer code + [#] + [5]. The panel temporarily enables a ring count

of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to "1" (callback not required).

2. Call the panel using the downloader software set to "FIRST

COMMUNICATION" mode.

3. The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel

information can then be downloaded.

Advisories:

1. Alarm and trouble responses

and reports are disabled

during on-line time. Should

an event occur during this

time, the response will take

place and the report will go

through as soon as the

remote access sequence is

completed. Alarm and trouble

conditions are not ignored,

they are simply delayed.

In order to remotely access, control, or program the alarm panel, a "link" must be

established between the computer and the control panel, as follows:

1. The computer calls up the Control panel. (The phone number for each

customer is entered into the customer's account file on the computer).

2. The Control panel "answers" at the pre-programmed ring count and executes

a handshake with the computer.

3. The computer sends a request for call-back to the Control, unless call-back is

not required.

4. The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up. During the next few

seconds, the Control will process the request making sure certain encrypted

information, received from the computer, matches its own memory.

5. Upon a successful match, the Control panel will seize the phone line and call

the computer back, unless call-back is not required.

2. The keypads are inactive

during downloading commu-

nication, and resume normal

functions after hang up. All

keypad entries are ignored

during on-line time.

6. The computer answers, usually by the second ring, and executes a

handshake with the panel.

7. The panel then sends other default information to the computer. If this

information matches the computer's information, a successful link is

established. This is known as being "ON-LINE".

Ð 84 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What Can Be Done Once

Panel Is "On-Line"?

¥ Arm the System in the Away Mode; Disarm the System

¥ Bypass a Zone

¥ Force the System to Accept a New Program Download

¥ Shut Down Communication (dialer) Functions (non-payment of monitoring fees

in an owned system)

¥ Shut Down all Security System Functions (non-payment for a leased system)

¥ Inhibit Local Keypad Programming (prevents takeover of your accounts)

¥ Leave a message for customer (alpha keypads ONLY)

¥ Command the System to Upload a Copy of its Resident Program to the office

¥ Read: Arming Status, AC Power Status, List of Faulted Zones, List of Bypassed

Zones, 100 Event Log, List of Zones Currently in Alarm, List of Zones Currently

in Trouble, List of RF sensors with low battery conditions

¥ Set the Real-Time clock.

How Secure Is

Downloading?

Accessing the Control from a remote location is protected against compromise by

the use of 4 levels of protection:

1. Security Code Handshake: The subscriber's account number as well as an 8-

digit ID number (known only to the office) must be matched between the

Control and computer.

2. Hang-Up and Call-Back: The Control panel will "hang-up" and call the

computer back at the pre-programmed number only if the security codes

match.

3. Data Encryption: All data that is exchanged between the computer and Control

is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone "tapping" the line and

corrupting data.

4. Operator Access Levels: Up to 15 operators can have access to the

DOWNLOADER, each having their own log-on code. However, each

operator can be assigned one of three levels of access in both FILE and

COMMAND functions, as follows:

File Access:

Read Only: able only to look at the database; cannot change any information, and

cannot see the customer's access codes.

Part Read/Write: able to look at and change all information. except the customer's

access codes.

Full Read/Write: able to look at and change any and all information in the

database.

Control/Comm Access:

Read Only: able only to Upload and arm the system. Not able to DISARM,

BYPASS, or change any information.

Part Read/Write: able to ARM, BYPASS, UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD but cannot

shutdown the system.

Full Read/Write: able to perform all control and status commands, as well as

shutdown all or part of the system.

NOTES:

1. Each time the Control panel is accessed (whether successful or

unsuccessful), a PROGRAM TAMPER report (*40) is sent to central station, if

programmed.

2. When downloading, the keypad will display "MODEM COMM".

3. Whenever a download or a save is performed, an automatic time stamp is

done in the downloading software, indicating the date and time of the last

download (or save) and the operator ID number.

4. The average time for a complete download, including initial call-up, hang-up

and call-back is under 4 minutes.

5. A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by

connecting a printer to the computer. Refer to your computer owner's manual

or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.

Ð 85 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIRECT WIRE DOWNLOADING

Direct Wire Downloading

Connections

The VISTA-40 can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line by

using AdemcoÕs V-Link downloading software (Rev. 4 or higher) or AdemcoÕs

Compass Windows downloading software, and a 4100SM Serial Module. The

direct wire downloading connection is to be temporary, and is not part of the

permanent installation. Direct wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer

during the installation process.

IMPORTANT: The connections between the VISTA-40 and the

4100SM are different than those shown in the 4100SM Installation

Instructions. See diagram below for correct connections. In addition, when the

"green" wire is referred to in step 2 of the IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY section of the

4100SM Instructions, use the "violet" wire.

Connector J8, located above connector J7 on the right hand side of the main PC

board, is intended to be interfaced to a computer. Make connections to a

computer as shown below.

J8 CONNECTOR

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE

To TB6 Aux. Power (+)

(25mA current draw)

To TB7 Aux. Power (-)

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

RED BLUE WHITE

DIRECT WIRE DOWNLOADING CONNECTIONS

Ð 86 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7. SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK

PROCEDURE

NOTE: A 6139 alpha keypad must be used to set the real-time clock, or the clock

can be set via the Downloader software. Only users with installer or master

authority level can set the real-time clock.

IMPORTANT:

This method is

different from the

previous method

To enter real-time clock mode, enter installer or master code + #63. A

typical display will show:

of setting

clock.

the

TIME/DATE Ð

12:01 AM

THU

11/07/96

The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered. Time

and date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour, minute,

month, day and year. Pressing the [*] key accepts the entered value and moves

the cursor to the right. Pressing the [#] key moves the cursor to the left of the

display, to the previous position.

To set the time and date, simply enter the correct hour, then press [*] to

move to the minutes and make the correct entry.

Press [*] again, then toggle the AM/PM by pressing any key 0Ð9.

Press [*] to move cursor to the month position and enter the correct month using

a 2-digit entry.

Press [*] and enter the correct date.

Press [*] and enter the correct year.

To exit clock mode, press the [*] key after the cursor is in the year position.

Time adjustments for daylight savings time are handled automatically by the

system (see data field options 2*01 and 2*02).

Ð 87 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART 3

SYSTEM OPERATION & TESTING

Ð 88 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1. SYSTEM OPERATION

SECURITY ACCESS CODES

General Information

The System allows up to a total of 70 security access codes to be assigned

(maximum of 69 in a given partition), each identified by a user ID number. In

addition, the Quick Arm feature can also be programmed, which enables the

[#] key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the

system. The code must still be entered when disarming the system.

NOTE: Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 2 is enabled for

Open/Close reporting. Quick Arm reports as User 0.

User Codes & Levels Of

Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned various levels of authority (tells system

what system functions that user is authorized to do), and can have different levels

of authority within each partition. Use the "View Capabilities" keypad function to

view the partitions and authority levels for which a particular user is authorized. In

highest to lowest ranking, these levels are described below.

Installer

(Level 0)

User 1

¥ Programmed in field *00 (default = 4-1-4-0).

Can be changed by installer.

¥ Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass,

etc.).

¥ Only code that allows entry to program mode.

¥ Installer code lockout if exit program mode via *98. This

prevents installer from re-accessing the program mode.

The only way to access Programming mode once this

feature is activated, is by powering down the system

and powering up again, and then pressing both the *

and # keys at the same time within 30 seconds of power

up.

Level Title

Installer

Master

Manager

Operator level A

Operator level B

Operator level C

Duress

¥ The installer must program at least one master

code. Master codes are the codes intended for use by

the primary users of the system.

¥ Can add, delete, or change master, manager, or

operator codes.

¥ Can select open/close reports for any user.

¥ Can perform normal system functions, but cannot

disarm if armed by a code other than Installer's code

(including Quick Arm).

¥ Enable open/close reporting for installer in field *39.

Master (Level 1) ¥ The Master Code is the code intended for use by the

primary users of the system when performing system

functions, and can be changed by the Master User.

¥ The master codes can be used to assign up to 68 lower

level codes, which can be used by other users of the

system who don't have a need to know the master

code.

¥ As shipped from the factory, there are no master or

manager codes pre-programmed. The installer must

program at least one master code during initial

installation.

¥ Master cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.

¥ Can change his own code.

¥ Can add, delete, change manager or operator codes.

Each user's code can be individually eliminated or

changed at any time.

¥ Open/close reporting of added users are same as that

of the master or manager adding the new user.

¥ Can perform all system functions.

Ð 89 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Codes & Levels Of

Authority (cont.)

Manager (Level 2) ¥ Can perform all system functions (Arm, Disarm, Bypass,

etc.) programmed by Master.

¥ May create other users of the system below this level

(Manager cannot assign anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).

¥ May change his own code.

Open/Close Reporting

Note: When adding a user,

the system will only prompt for

Open/Close report capability if

the user is being added by the

Installer. When a Master or

Manager adds a new user, the

new user's Open/Close report-

ing enable will be the same as

that of the Master or Manager

adding the user. If Open/Close

reports are required to be

selectable by the Master or

Manager, the Installer should

assign two Master or Manager

user codes: one with

Open/Close reporting enabled,

and one without Open/Close

reporting.

¥ May add, delete, change operators.

¥ Open/close reporting of added users will be same as his

own (enabled/disabled as set by installer or master).

¥ May operate a partition.

Operator

(Levels 3-5)

¥ Operators can arm and disarm the system to the authority

assigned, but cannot add or modify any user code.

¥ May operate a partition with one of the three

OPERATOR authority levels A through C listed below.

Level Title

Functions Permitted

Arm, Disarm, Bypass

Arm, Disarm

Arm, Disarm only if armed with

same code

Operator A

Operator B

Operator C

¥ Operator C (sometimes known as Baby-sitter code),

cannot disarm the system unless the system was armed

with that code. This code is usually assigned to persons

who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at

specific times only (ex. a baby-sitter needs to control the

system only when baby-sitting).

Duress (Level 6) ¥ The duress code is a means of sending a silent alarm to a

central monitoring station if the user is being forced to

disarm (or arm) the system under threat. This feature is

only useful if the system is connected to a central station.

¥ When the system's Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are

connected to another communication's media (Derived

Channel/Long Range Radio), note that duress is

signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic

(whereas duress has a unique report when digitally

communicated).

¥ The duress code is assigned on a partition by partition

basis and can be any code desired.

¥ When used, the system will disarm (or arm), but will also

send a silent alarm to the central station (if service is

connected). There will be no indication at the keypad

that an alarm was sent.

¥ Duress Reporting Note: The Duress report triggering

logic activates on the 5th key depression (ex. OFF), not

the 4th key depression (last digit of code). Duress reports

will not be triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when

performing a GOTO or viewing capabilities of users.

General Rules on Authority Levels and changes

The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system

based on the user code authority levels:

¥ Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when

performing system functions within a partition (a system armed with a user's

temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another user's

temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code described above.

¥ A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER

authority than which he is assigned.

¥ A user (levels 0, 1 & 2 only) may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level.

¥ A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he

himself has access.

Ð 90 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

¥ A user can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition he is

assigned.

¥ User numbers must be entered as 2-digit entries. Single digit user numbers

must, therefore, always be preceded by a "0" (example, 03, 04, 05, etc.). Make

sure the end user understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered

as 4-digit numbers.

Important!: Unless Ademco Contact ID reporting is used, only user codes

#1Ð#15 can uniquely report to the central station using the communication

formats provided. Users #16Ð#70 will report as User #15, if enabled for

open/close reporting, for the other reporting formats.

Multiple Partition Access

Examples

(GOTO Function)

To make a partitioned environment particularly useful, the system must allow for

certain people to have access to other partitions. This is particularly true in the

Factory/Office environment where the president of the company wants access to

any area of his company. The VISTA-40 has total flexibility in supporting this

requirement. On a USER basis, each user is programmed for a base partition (the

one he normally is assigned) and the other partition which he can be authorized

to access.

In addition, within each partition, each USER may be programmed to have

different levels of authority. For example, User #3, the V.P. of Engineering,

could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of

ABC Manufacturing. Since he needs the full capabilities in his area, he is

assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority. This means he may Arm, Disarm,

Bypass, Add or Modify users in partition 1. It is also a requirement that he be able

to gain access to the manufacturing area (partition 2) on an emergency basis. You

can set this up easily with the VISTA-40 by now requesting that he also be

assigned to partition 2, with a level of authority set lower, such as Level 4

(OPERATOR Level B) which allows him to Arm and Disarm, but nothing else. The

control will automatically assign him the next available user number within partition

2 and does not require reprogramming of his already existing 4 digit security

code! This type of setup can be done for each user of the system and for any

combination of up to 2 partitions.

EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS

Part 1

User 3

Part 2

User 5

Level 1 Level 4

Master Oper B

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in partition 1 and

OPERATOR B authority in partition 2. His user number in partition 2 is User 5 and

his 4 digit code is the same for both partitions. If a user number is already being

used in a partition, the system will automatically assign another, unused User

number.

Assigning users to the other partition is one thing, but how about actually being a

user and trying to "see" one of the other partitions? The VISTA-40 has

developed a simple key sequence (code + [*] + partition number 0Ð2; partition 0

returns to the default partition for that keypad) for a user to go to another partition.

Once there, the current display becomes attached to that partition and status

requests, etc., are now displayed for that partition, unless a period of 120

seconds elapses with no key entries. To return to your original partition, you may

enter the same key sequence and end it with your normal partition number or "0".

You're now back to where you started. It's that simple! You may view this

operation as a big selector switch and you are at the switch at the keypad.

EXAMPLE:

User may be regularly assigned to partition 1. This would be the default display

for this user, however he may "select" to go to partition 2 for example. (Assumes

he has been programmed for access to partition 2.) The user enters his normal

access code and the proper sequence to select another partition followed by the

number 2 for partition 2. The display will now select partition 2 information for view

and further action.

Ð 91 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To ADD a Master, Manager

or Operator code

Important!: During user code entry, normal key depressions at other keypads in

a partition will be ignored. However, panic key depression will cause an alarm and

terminate user entry.

Installer must program

at least one Master

code.

Note: User codes cannot be added by using the Phone Module. User codes

must be added by using an alpha keypad only.

Enter Installer Code + [8] + new User # (02-69) + new User's code

Keypad will prompt for the Authority Level for this user.

Enter the level number as follows:

User Number = 03

Or Master or Manager code,

but must be code with higher

level of authority than the

code being changed. (i.e.

Master code can add a

Manager or Operator level

code, but cannot add

1 = Master (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify lower

level users)

Enter Auth.Level

2 = Manager (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify lower

level users)

3 = Operator Level A (Arm, Disarm, Bypass)

4 = Operator Level B ( Arm, Disarm)

another Master code;

5 = Operator Level C ( Arm, Disarm only if system armed

with this code)

Manager code can add an

Operator level code, but

cannot add a Master or

another Manager code).

6 = Duress (Arm, Disarm, triggers silent panic alarm)

Keypad will then prompt for Open/Close reporting

option for this user.

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or

not arming/disarming by this user will trigger opening

& closing reports. This prompt appears only if the

installer code is used to add a user.

Open/Close Rep.?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If a 5800 series button transmitter has been enabled,

and not assigned to a user, this prompt will appear.

RF Button ?

0=NO , 1=YES

If yes was given as the answer to the RF button

question, the zone number for the button will be

requested. Enter one of the zone numbers

assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY

or DISARM. The system will then assign any STAY,

AWAY or DISARM buttons of the transmitter to this

user number.

Enter Button ZN #

(01-63)

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES). If NO, the program exits this

mode. If yes, the Keypad prompts for the Global Arm

option for this user.

Multi-Access ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or

not this user will be allowed to arm more than one

partition via Global Arm prompts (described in the

KEYPAD FUNCTIONS section) .

Global Arm ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If the Multi-Access option was selected for this user,

the keypad now prompts for the userÕs access to the

next partition.

Ð 92 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or

not this user will have access to the displayed

partition number. If NO, the keypad displays this

prompt for the next partition number in sequence.

Part. 2 Ð SHOP ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:

¥ UserÕs authority level in the displayed partition (see

Authority Level prompt above). Note that the user

number in the displayed partition is automatically

assigned.

¥ Open/Close option for this user in the displayed

partition (see Open/Close prompt above).

¥ Global Arm option for this user in the displayed

partition.

When both partitions have been displayed, the

keypad will scroll through the partition(s) to which

access has been assigned, and will display the user

number, authority level, open/close and global arm

options that were programmed for each partition the

user was granted access. For example:

Note that the ÒGÓ following the authority level

indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for

this user in the displayed partition, and that the

period at the end of the second line indicates

open/close reporting is enabled for this user in the

displayed partition. The "S" indicates the partition

from which the user may be changed or deleted.

Part. 1 S WHSE

User 03 Auth=3G.

To CHANGE a Master,

Manager or Operator code

Enter Installer code + [8] + User number (02-69) + new code for that user.

The system will detect that the user number is already assigned and will prompt if

this is a new user. Press 0 (NO).

The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based on authorization

level. If the user number is the same as the Installer's, the system will prompt for

the new code to be reentered. This prevents accidentally changing a high level

code.

Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the

code being changed. (i.e. Master code can change a Manager or Operator level code,

but cannot change another Master code; a Manager code can change an Operator level

code, but cannot change a Master or another Manager code).

To DELETE a Master,

Manager or Operator code

Enter Installer code + [8] + User number (02-69) + Installer code

The system will prompt if this code should be deleted. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

If yes, that user's code will be removed from all partitions to which it had been

assigned, and all authorization levels and other information about that user will be

deleted. Note that a user can only be deleted from the partition in which it was first

assigned, and can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level. A user

cannot delete himself.

Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the

code being deleted. (i.e. Master code can delete a Manager or Operator level code, but

cannot delete another Master code; a Manager code can delete an Operator level code,

but cannot delete a Master or another Manager code).

To EXIT The User Code

Entry Mode

Press either [*] or [#], or don't press any key for 10 seconds.

Ð 93 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEYPAD FUNCTIONS

General Information

The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system, and perform other

system functions, such as bypassing zones, view messages from the central

station and display zone descriptors. Zone and system conditions (alarm, trouble,

bypass) are displayed in the Display Window.

When an alarm occurs, keypad sounding and external sounding will occur, and

the zone(s) in alarm will be displayed on the keypad. Pressing any key will silence

the keypad sounder for 10 seconds. Disarming the system will silence both

keypad and external sounders. When the system is disarmed, any zones that

were in an alarm condition during the armed period will be displayed (memory of

alarm). To clear this display, simply repeat the disarm sequence (enter the security

code and press the OFF key).

The keypads also feature chime annunciation, and 3 panic key pairs (for silent,

audible, fire or personal emergency alarms) which can notify the central station of

an alarm condition, if that service is connected.

NOTE: Throughout this manual, the term "alpha keypad" refers equally to the

6139 alpha keypad or 6139AV voice/alpha keypad.

Phone Module

Refer to the separate instructions supplied with the Phone Module for

information concerning its operating procedures.

Important: The Phone Module cannot be used to add user codes in this

system. User codes must be added by using an alpha keypad only.

Arming Functions

The following is a brief list of system commands. For detailed information

concerning system functions, refer to the User's Manual.

Disarmed, Not Ready Before arming, the system must be in the READY

condition (all zones must be intact). If the "NOT

READY" message appears, press the READY [*] key

to display faulted zones.

Note that if QUICK ARM is

enabled (field *29), the [#]

key can be pressed instead

of entering the security

code, for any of the arming

procedures (Away, Stay,

Instant, Maximum, etc.).

Arming Away

Arming Stay

Enter code + AWAY [2].

Enter code + STAY [3].

Enter code + INSTANT [7].

Enter code + MAXIMUM [4].

Arming Instant

Arming Maximum

Global Arming

If enabled for the user, the keypad will display the

following:

ARM ALL

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If NO, the keypad prompts for arming each partition

individually. If YES, the system attempts to arm all partitions

allowed by this user. If there are any faults (open doors,

windows, etc.) the keypad will display them. See notes below.

These faults must be corrected or the zone bypassed before

arming will occur. When faults are corrected, repeat the arming

procedure.

Global Arming Notes: 1. When using the Global Arm feature, if there are faults in

any of the selected partitions, the system will enter a

summary mode in which the faulted zones of all of the

selected partitions will be displayed. These faults must be

corrected or bypassed (code + BYPASS + [#] will attempt

to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions). This

summary mode will end in approx. 120 seconds if no keys

are pressed.

2. If, when disarming the system using a Global Disarm, any

of the selected partitions has a condition which would

cause the keypad to beep (such as alarm memory or a

trouble condition), the system will cause the keypad to

beep and will enter a summary mode in which the alarm

memory or trouble conditions of all of the selected

partitions will be displayed. This mode will continue until

either approx. 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm

occurs which clears the beeping condition.

3. Global arming cannot be performed from a wireless keypad

or a non-alpha display keypad.

Disarming

Enter code + OFF [1].

Ð 94 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bypassing Zones

Chime Mode

Enter code + BYPASS [6] + zone number. To

automatically bypass all faulted zones, use "Quick

Bypass" method: Enter code + BYPASS + [#].

Enter code + CHIME [9]. To turn chime mode off, enter

code + CHIME again.

SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES

Features For Each Arming Mode

Exit Delay Entry Delay Perimeter Armed Interior Armed

M o d e

A W A Y

S T A Y

INSTANT

MAXIMUM

Yes

Access Control

If programmed, one relay may be used for access control. To activate this relay,

the user enters his user code + [0]. The designated relay will pulse for 2 seconds.

Each partition can have its own output device. The trigger will occur on the device

tied to the partition for the keypad on which the keys were pressed. The access

control relay is programmed in partition-specific field 1*76.

Partition "GOTO"

Commands

Each keypad (and the 4285 Phone Module) is assigned a default (home) partition

for display purposes, and will show only that partition's information. To see

information for another partition, or perform system functions in another partition,

use the GOTO command (code + [*] + partition number 0-2). The keypad will

remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition, or until 120

seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity.

For example: 4-1-4-0 + * + [1] = GOTO partition 1

4-1-4-0 + * + [2] = GOTO partition 2

4-1-4-0 + * + [0] = GOTO home partition (i.e. partition defined in

programming for this keypad)

device

View Capabilities

Of A User (Alpha

Keypads Only)

The keypad will display the partitions that user is authorized for, the user number,

and the authority level for all partitions authorized. Enter code + [*] + [*]. The

user's capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as

follows:

The user's Open/Close report capability is shown by the

dot following the authority level. If Open/Close is not

enabled for a user, the dot will not appear.

Part. 1 WHSE

User 01 Auth.=1.

Viewing Downloaded

Messages

(Alpha Keypads Only)

Users may occasionally receive messages on the keypad display from their

installation company. When this occurs, the keypad will display "Message. Press

0 for 5 secs.". Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central

station's message. The system must be in the READY state to view these

messages.

Using The Built-In User's

Manual

(Alpha Keypads Only)

An abbreviated User's Manual is stored in the system's memory, and can be

particularly useful to the end user if the printed User's Manual is not conveniently

accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system

procedure. The Built-in User's Guide is displayed by simply pressing any of the

function keys (e.g., OFF, AWAY, STAY, MAXIMUM, BYPASS, INSTANT, CODE,

TEST, READY, #, and CHIME) for approximately 5 seconds and then releasing it.

Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been pressed will then be

displayed (2 lines of text are displayed at a time). This function operates in either

the armed or the disarmed state.

Displaying Descriptors

(Alpha Keypads Only)

The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors, which is useful to the

installer when checking entries, and can be helpful to the user when there is a

need to identify zones. To display descriptors, the keypads must display a

SYSTEM READY message. Press and hold the READY key until the built-in

instructions for that key appear, then release the key. The zone descriptors will

appear one at a time, for about 2-3 seconds each. For faster viewing, press the

READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order and so on. When all

descriptors have been displayed, the Control will exit display mode. To exit

display mode before all descriptors have been displayed, enter the security code

and press the OFF key.

Ð 95 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panic Keys

There are three panic keys (or panic key pairs) that, if programmed, can be used

to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central station. Each key pair

can be individually programmed for 24-Hour Silent, Audible or Auxiliary

(Emergency) responses. The panic function is activated when the appropriate

key is pressed (or key pair is pressed at the same time).

The panic functions are identified by the system as follows:

PANIC

Displayed as Zone

A or [*] + [1]

C or [#] + [3]

B or [*] + [#]

For alpha keypads, these panic keys

can also be programmed with an alpha

descriptor.

Important: for the Panic functions to be of practical value, the system must be

connected to a central station.

End User Relay Command

Mode

(#70 Mode)

The system allows users to activate relays/X-10 modules by keypad command using

either the keypad or a telephone keypad (if phone module is used). The user will be

prompted (either by keypad alpha display or phone module)

To activate relays from a keypad, enter 4-digit security code + [#] +70.

To activate relays using a telephone and phone module, first dial the 2-digit

phone access code. When the system acknowledges the access, enter 4-digit

security code + [#] + 70. The following prompts/voice responses will begin.

Voice: "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW".

Enter the 2-digit number of the relay/X-10 module to

be activated.

ENTER DEVICE NO.

00=QUIT

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT 0=OFF , 1=ON

Voice: "voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON/OFF. FOR

voice descriptor ON, ENTER 1, FOR voice descriptor

OFF, ENTER 0"

Press 1 or 2 to turn the device off or on respectively.

"nn" represents the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number

and voice descriptor is the relay voice descriptor

programmed by the installer (see relay descriptor

programming section).

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT THE "*" KEY

Voice: "voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON/OFF. TO

EXIT, ENTER 00 NOW"

From a keypad, press [*] to continue. The ENTER

DEVICE NO. prompt will appear.

From a telephone keypad, enter 00 to exit, or enter the

next relay number to be programmed. The current

on/off state of that relay will be annunciated as

described above. Alternatively, if 6 seconds elapses

with no key depression, the phone module will repeat

the "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW" message.

Trouble Conditions

The word "CHECK" on the Keypad's display, accompanied by a rapid "beeping"

at the Keypad, indicates that there is a trouble condition in the system. The

audible warning sound can be silenced by pressing any key. Instruct users to call

for service immediately upon seeing any of the following messages.

"Check" Messages

¥ "CHECK" with one or more zone descriptor(s) indicates that a problem exists

with those zone(s). First, determine if the zone(s) displayed are intact and make

them so if they are not. If the problem has been corrected, key an OFF

sequence (Code plus OFF) to clear the display.

Zones 88-91, 87, 93 and 97

can be assigned alpha

descriptors

¥ "CHECK 97" indicates that a short exists on the Polling Loop and may

eliminate some of the protection.

¥ "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "88", "89", "90", or "91"

indicates an RF Receiver problem.

¥ "CHECK 87" indicates an 4285 phone module problem.

¥ "CHECK 93" indicates an VIM voice interface module problem.

Other Trouble

Conditions

¥ "COMM. FAILURE" (alpha) or "FC" (fixed-word) at the Keypad indicates that

a failure occurred in the telephone communication portion of your system.

Ð 96 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

¥ "LO BAT" (alpha) or "BAT" (fixed-word) and a zone descriptor, and a once per

minute beep at the Keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists in the

wireless transmitter displayed. Silence the warning sound by pressing any key.

"SYSTEM LO BAT" (alpha) or "BAT" with no zone number (fixed-word)

indicates a low battery condition with the system's backup battery.

¥ "RCVR SET UP ERROR" (alpha) or "E8" (fixed-word) at the keypad

indicates that the system has more RF zones programmed than the installed RF

receiver can support. If this is not corrected, none of the zones in the system

will be protected. If more RF zones are desired, use an appropriate Receiver

that supports more zones (ex. 4281H, 5881H).

¥ "MODEM COMM" (alpha) or "CC" (fixed-word) indicates that the control is on-

line with the remote computer and the control is not operating. Panel's response

to alarm and trouble conditions will be delayed until on-line session is completed.

Power Failure

If the POWER indicator is off, and the message "AC LOSS" (alpha) or "NO

AC" (fixed-word) is displayed, the Keypad is operating on battery power only.

Check to see that your system's plug-in transformer has not been accidentally

pulled out. Instruct the user to call a service representative immediately if AC

power cannot be restored.

VIM VOICE INTERFACE MODULE OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

General Information

When an alarm occurs, the control sends a "listen-in will follow" message (Contact

ID report code 606) to the central station after the alarm report has been

completed, or it will wait 5 minutes for a callback from the central station with

correct 4-digit Audio ID code if the AUTO CALLBACK feature is enabled. If the

AUTO CALLBACK feature is disabled, the central station's digital receiver then

holds the phone line for 1 minute, providing time for the operator to begin a 2-way

voice session with the premises by pressing a command key (see Operator

Commands table). The 6139AV keypads at the premises automatically activate

their "listen" mode.

If the AUTO CALLBACK feature is enabled, the central stationÕs digital receiver

will hang up immediately after any alarm report is sent. The central station operator

will now have 5 minutes in which to call back and enter a 4-digit Audio ID code

(entry must take no longer than 90 seconds) to initiate a 2-way voice session.

This should be used in systems where a digital receiver other than the Ademco

685 is used, or where the 685 Rev is lower than 4.6. If a 685 receiver with Rev

4.6 or higher is used, then either method can be used for 2-way voice initiation.

AUTO CALLBACK is recommended for dual reporting so that alarms can go to

both primary and secondary before the 2-way session begins.

IMPORTANT: Central station telephones not rated to operate at 4 volts or less may

not work properly with 2-way voice sessions if the 685 Digital Receiver remains on the

same line during the session. Switching the 685 to another incoming line after

connection of the 2-way voice session remedies this problem and allows the 685 to

remain available for other alarm reports.

During a 2-way voice session, all keypad alarm and check sounds are silenced.

External sirens connected to the control and/or relay module continue to sound

until the central station operator presses a key (refer to the RELAY

PROGRAMMING section).

NOTES:

1. If a fire alarm or panic alarm occurs during a 2-way voice session, the session

in progress is terminated. The control dials in again to report the new alarm

and a new 2-way voice session can begin.

2. During a 2-way voice session keypad alarm and check sounds are silenced. If

an alarm occurs in another partition and VIM CHIME is disabled or set for

"ALL" Mode, the keypads remain silenced, but the alarm is displayed at the

keypads in that partition. If an alarm occurs in another partition and VIM CHIME

is enabled, the keypads in the other partition sound the alarm unless set for

"ALL" mode.

3. AUTO CALLBACK is initiated when the central station operator depresses

[8] [8]. This suspends the 2-way voice session until the operator calls back

within 5 minutes and enters the proper 4-digit ID code (field 1 59).

Ð 97 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note: If the operator makes a mistake in entering the proper 4-digit ID code,

the operator just needs to re-enter the correct code. If after 5 minutes have

elapsed without the central station callback, only a new alarm will initiate a new

2-way voice session.

Operator Commands

The following table summarizes the central station operator commands available.

To perform a command, the operator simply presses the appropriate telephone

key(s).

OPERATOR COMMANDS

Key Function

Comments

Operator can speak to persons on

premises.

Talk Mode

(1 beep)

VOX Mode (2-way voice)

(2 beeps)

Operator can both speak and listen

to persons on premises.

Listen Mode

(3 beeps)

Operator can listen to activity at the

premises. Repeated depressions of

"3" toggle keypad listening levels from

high to medium to low to high, etc.

Select Next Keypad

Select Keypad #2

Select Keypad #3

The first keypad is keypad #1.

Extend timeout 90 secs

This allows more time for the operator

to begin a session.

8 8

Disconnect with callback

The operator can choose to discon-

nect the session, but call back within 5

minutes.

9 9

Disconnect

Return to Listen to All Mode

This command terminates a session.

*8nn Select Keypad nn

(keypad No. 01-15)

Use this command to select any

keypad. e.g. *803 selects keypad #3.

Returns session to Listen Mode

Reset and select Keypad #1

EVENT LOGGING

Event Logging Procedures

IMPORTANT: In order for time and date stamping to occur, the

system's real-time clock must be set. Refer to the SETTING THE

REAL TIME CLOCK section.

The system has the ability to record various events in a history log (100 event

capacity) wherein each event is recorded in one of five categories (alarm, check,

bypass, open & system), with the time and date of its occurrence (if real-time clock

is set). The log may be viewed (Display Mode) using an alpha keypad.

NOTE: The VISTA-40 does not support event log printing.

EVENT LOG MODE COMMANDS

Display Mode (installer or master):

Clear Event Log (installer only):

To EXIT Event Log Mode:

Enter CODE + [#] + [6] + [0]

Enter CODE + [#] + [6] + [2]

Press [*] at any time.

Programming

The system can be configured for the following event log activities:

¥ Specific categories of events can be selectively enabled (field 1*70).

¥ The time stamp can be set for either 12 or 24 hour formats (field 1*71).

¥ Set event log time/date report enable (fields 1*40 & 1*41).

Event Logging Display

After entering event log mode, the following will be displayed:

The Event Log holds up to 100 events, and can display

all events in a category (complete), or only those events

in a category occurring since the last Clear Event Log

command (recent). Note that once the Event Log is full,

the oldest event will be erased upon logging of any new

event. Press the desired display mode key, 0 or 1.

ENTER 0 = RECENT

1 = COMPLETE

Ð 98 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The system allows viewing of any partition's event log.

Enter the partition number for the partition whose events

are to be displayed. Entering 0 (NO) will display all events

that occurred in the system regardless of partition.

SCAN LOG BY PART

0=NO 1-2=PART #

For display purposes, events are stored on a partition by

partition basis (except system events), and are grouped

into five categories as follows.

Use the [3] & [1] keys to scroll to the next or previous category screens

respectively:

Displays time/date for zones that have either caused an

alarm or have been restored in selected partition.

ALARM EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have caused a trouble or

supervisory condition in selected partition.

CHECK EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have been bypassed in

selected partition.

BYPASS EVENT LOG

TYPE

CCC UUU

Displays time, date and user number for each arming and

disarming of the system for the partition selected. Note

that only those users enabled by the installer during

"add a user" procedure will be logged.

OP/CL EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for system problems, such as AC

Loss, communication failure, etc., regardless of partition.

SYSTEM EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays all categories of events in chronological order,

from most recent to oldest.

ALL EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

To display the events in a particular category, press [8] at the desired

category screen.

If in Display Mode, events will appear one at a time from the most recent to the

oldest. Use the [1] key to display events backward in time (from recent to past).

Use the [3] key to display events forward in time. The following is a typical display:

Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of partition 2, at

12:02AM on January 1.

P2 01/01 12:02AM

BURGLARY C03

After the last event in the selected category has been displayed, the system will

automatically return to the next event category screen.

Clear Event Log

To clear the Event Log, enter installer code + [#] + [6] + [2]

The following will appear:

CLEAR EVENT LOG

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if Event Log is to be cleared from memory. All events in the log will still

be displayed if the COMPLETE option is selected. Only those events occurring

from the time of the CLEAR command will be displayed if RECENT display option

is selected. Press [0] if event log is not to be cleared at this time.

If [1] is pressed, the following will appear:

ARE YOU SURE?

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if it is desired to clear the event log. Press [0] if event log is not to be

cleared.

Screen Definitions

RECENT

COMPLETE

TYPE

Events since last CLEAR

Displays all events

Type of event (Burg., Fire, etc.)

Zone (contact) number

User number

CCC

UUU

Ð 99 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2. TESTING THE SYSTEM

After the installation is completed, the Security System should be thoroughly

tested on a partition by partition basis as follows:

Using The Test Mode

1. With the System in the disarmed state, check that all zones are intact. If

DISARMED - Press [*] to show faults is displayed, press the [*] key to display

the descriptors of the faulted zone(s). Restore faulted zone(s) if necessary, so

that

word keypads) is displayed.

DISARMED /READY TO ARM (Alpha keypads), or READY (Fixed-

****

***

2. Enter the security code and press the TEST key. The external sounder (if

used) should sound for 3 seconds and then turn off (the system is operating

on the back-up battery only at this time).

NOTES:

¥ If the sounder does not sound, this may be an indication that the backup

battery is discharged or missing.

¥ As a reminder that the system is in the Test mode, the Keypad will sound a

single beep at 15-second intervals.

¥ In the Test mode, no alarm reports will be sent to the central station. Also, the

external sounder (if used) will not be activated.

Doors and Windows

Motion Detectors

Open and close each protected door and window in turn. Each action should

produce three beeps from the Keypad. The descriptor for each protection zone

will appear on the Keypad display.

Walk in front of any interior motion detectors. Listen for three beeps when the

detector senses movement. While it is activated, its descriptor will remain

displayed on the Keypad. Note that wireless PIRs will have a 3 minute lockout

between transmissions to conserve battery life (remove cover for walk test to

override the 3-minute lock-out).

Smoke Detectors

Follow the test procedure provided by the manufacturer of each smoke detector

to ensure that all detectors are operational and are functioning properly.

NOTE: A 2-wire smoke detector display will not clear until the Test mode is exited.

Turning Off TEST mode

Enter the security code and press the OFF key.

Armed System Test

IMPORTANT! A message will be sent to the central station during the following

tests. Notify the central station that a test will be in progress.

NOTE: A display of "COMM. FAILURE" indicates a failure to communicate (no

Kissoff by the receiver at the central station after the maximum number of

transmission attempts is tried). If this occurs, verify that the phone line is

connected, the correct report format is programmed, etc.

1. Arm the system and fault one or more zones. Silence alarm sounder(s) each

time by entering the code and pressing OFF. Check that Entry/Exit delay

zones provide the assigned delay times.

2. Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if programmed in field *05, by pressing the

programmed panic keys (or panic key pairs on some keypads)

A or [*] + [1]

C or [#] + [3]

B or [*] + [#]

ALARM and 95 will be displayed

ALARM and 96 will be displayed

ALARM and 99 will be displayed

If the system has been programmed for audible emergency, the keypad will

emit a loud, steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by entering the security

code and pressing OFF. If the system has been programmed for silent panic,

there will be no audible alarms or displays. A report will be sent to the central

station, however.

NOTE: A 2-way voice session will begin (if so programmed) during this test if

any of the Panic keys are programmed to report to the central station.

3. Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with them.

Ð 100 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-Way Voice Test Mode

At the Protected Premises:

To test the VIM and 6139AV keypad 2-way voice operation, both the installer at

the protected premises and the central station operator do the following.

NOTE: The VIM has built-in LEDs which identify its operating mode. It can be

helpful to view these LEDs when performing the following test. To view the

LEDs, remove the VIM's cover and refer to the table that follows.

VIM STATUS LED FUNCTIONS

LED

NO LED LIT

RED LIT

STATE

Off

MEANING

VIM Idle

Steady

Flashing

Steady

Talk to single keypad

Talk to All Mode

VOX Mode

GREEN LIT

BOTH LIT

Steady

Listen to single keypad

Flashing in unison

Alternating Flash

Listen to All Mode

Waiting for operator's callback ID code

1. The installer enters the security code and presses #65 at a 6139AV 2-way

voice keypad.

The keypad displays "AUDIO 2WAY TEST" momentarily and a test message

is sent to the central station, with a "listen-in to follow" message (a Callback will

be required if in the Auto Callback mode).

The keypad then initially displays the "LISTEN MODE" message (if so

programmed via "VIM TEXT" option). Subsequently, this message changes,

depending on the 2-way voice mode the central station operator selects

(step 1 of "At the Central Station" below), such as "LISTEN MODE" (3

beeps), "TALK MODE" (1 beep), or "VOX MODE" (2 beeps).

2. The installer can say something verbally to the central station operator from

this keypad to confirm that the "listen-in" is working properly.

3. The installer should speak out loud near each of the 2-way voice keypads so

the operator can confirm their operation.

4. The installer can adjust the "Talk Mode" audio level using the procedure

described earlier.

At the Central Station:

1. When the test message and listen-in to follow message is received, the

operator lifts the receiver to begin a 2-way voice session and presses a

command key (see VIM OPERATOR FUNCTIONS section earlier in this

manual). If Auto Callback option is chosen, the operator will have to call back

within 5 minutes to begin a 2-way voice session.

The system defaults to "LISTEN MODE."

2. The operator should listen for the installer's verbal message. The operator

can then switch to "TALK MODE" or "VOX MODE" and say something to the

installer at the premises to confirm proper operation of these modes.

3. The operator should switch to each of the other installed 2-way voice

keypads and listen for the installer's verbal message.

4. The operator can switch to "talk Mode" and speak while the installer adjusts

the keypad's audio level.

5. In partitioned systems, repeat this test in each partition.

To test the operator-initiated callback feature and audio ID number, the

operator can enter Ò88Ó, hang up, and call back within 5 minutes and enter

the proper ID code (field 1*59).

To end this test mode, the operator enters "99." This test mode also automatically

ends after 90 seconds if no commands are issued.

Ð 101 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turning The System Over

To The User

1. Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its

functions as well as the User's Manual supplied.

2. In particular, explain the operation of each zone (entry/exit, perimeter,

interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the user understands how to operate any

emergency feature(s) programmed into the system.

IMPORTANT!: In the spaces provided in the User's Manual, record the

Entry and Exit Delay times, and those functions that have been programmed

into the available PANIC keys or key pairs.

3. Make sure the user understands the importance of testing the system at least

weekly, following the procedure provided in the User's Manual.

TO THE INSTALLER

Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) by the installer and

frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any

alarm system.

The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a

regular maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the

proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts.

Recommendations must be included for a specific program of frequent testing

(at least weekly) to insure the system's proper operation at all times.

Ð 102 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3. SUMMARY OF SYSTEM COMMANDS

TYPES OF COMMANDS

DESIRED FUNCTION

PROCEDURE

Arming, Disarming Arming Away

And Silencing Commands Arming Stay

Quick Arm

Enter User Code + AWAY [2]

Enter User Code + STAY [3]

Enter [#] instead of user code followed by

AWAY [2] or STAY [3]

Disarming

Silencing

Enter User Code + OFF [1]

Enter User Code OFF [1]

Bypassing Commands

Bypassing Zone

Enter User Code + BYPASS [6] + Zone Number

To automatically bypass all faulted zones, use

quick bypass

Quick Bypass

Enter User Code + BYPASS [6] + [#]

User Code Edit Commands

Add User Code

Enter Your User Code + [8] + New User Number

+ New User Code (Installer, Master Or Manager

User Only)

Change User Code

Delete User Code

View User Capabilities

Enter Your User Code + [8] + User Number To

Change + New User Code (Installer, Master Or

Manager User Only)

Enter Your User Code + [8] + User Number To

Delete + Your User Code (Installer, Master Or

Manager User Only)

Enter User Code + [*] + [*]

Chime Mode Commands

Real Time Clock Commands

System Test Commands

Event Logging Commands

Chime On

Chime Off

Enter User Code + CHIME [9]

Enter User Code + CHIME [9] Again

Setting/Viewing

Enter User Code + [#] + 63

(Installer Or Master User Only)

Burglary Walk Test

2-Way Audio Test

Enter User Code + TEST [5]

Enter Installer's Code + [#] + 65

Display Log

Clear Log

Enter User Code + [#] + 60

(Installer Or Master User Only)

Enter Installer's Code + [#] + 62

Program Mode

And Download Commands

Enter Program Mode

Exit Program Mode

Site Initiated Download

Enter Installer's Code + [8] + 00

Enter *99 (No Lockout) Or *98 (Lockout)

Enter Installer's Code + [#] + [1]

Scheduling Related

Commands

Edit Open/Close Windows

Edit Temporary Schedules

Delay Closing Time

Enter Installer's Code + [#] + 80

Enter User Code + [#] + 81

Enter User Code + [#] + 82

Enter User Code + [#] + 83

Edit User Timer Schedules

Miscellaneous Relay

Commands

Trip Access Door Relay

Turn Relay On/Off

Enter User Code + [0]

(when 4204 relay programmed for this)

Enter User Code + [#] + 71 or 72

(when 4204 relay programmed for one of these)

Miscellaneous User

Commands

GOTO Group #X

User Self Help

Enter User Code + [*] + Partition Number (0-2)

(using 0 returns to home group)

Press Desired Function Key For 5 Seconds

(displays help for that function key)

Press [*] Key For 5 Seconds

View Zone Descriptors

(scrolls zone descriptors one at a time)

Ð 103 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wireless System

House Id Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + [2] (installer only)

Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + [3] (installer only)

Go/No Go Test = Code + TEST [5] Key)

Keypad Functions

Arming Away:

Arming Stay:

Enter Code + Away [2].

Enter Code + Stay [3].

Enter Code + Instant [7].

Enter Code + Maximum [4].

Arming Instant:

Arming Maximum:

Quick Arm:

Use # Key Instead Of User Code Followed By

Any Of The Above Arming Mode Keys.

Global Arming:

If Enabled For The User, The Keypad Will Display

a Prompt. Answer The Prompted Questions.

Disarming:

Enter Code + Off [1].

Bypassing Zones:

Enter Code + Bypass [6] + Zone Number

To Automatically Bypass All Faulted Zones,

Use "Quick BypassÓ Method.

Quick Bypass:

Chime Mode:

Enter Code + Bypass + [#].

Enter Code + Chime [9]. To Turn Chime Mode Off,

Enter Code + Chime [9] Again.

Partition GOTO:

User Code + [*] + Partition Number 1Ð2

GOTO Home Partition: User Code + [*] + [0]

Panics:

[*] + [1] Zone 95 (or A Key)

[*] + [#] Zone 99 (or B Key)

[#] + [3] Zone 96 (or C Key)

View Downloaded Messages = Press [0] For 5 Seconds

Display All Zone Descriptors = Press [*] For 5 Seconds

Display User Self-Help = Hold Any Key For 5 Seconds

Programming Commands

Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + [1]

Direct Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + [5]

Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8 0 0

Exit Program Mode = *99 or *98

Ð 104 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4. REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS

UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The following requirements apply to UL Residential Burglary installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.

4. The Control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a tamper switch on the

cabinet door (not supplied with VISTA-40) or by installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect

cabinet access. Wire the selected device to any EOLR supervised zone (zone 1-8). Program this zone for day

trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24 hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24 hour alarm response must be used for

multiple partitioned systems.

5. Remote Downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use. The FCC requires the following

statement for your information:

This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is, in strict accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and

found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC Rules,

which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

¥ If using an indoor antenna, have a quality outdoor antenna installed.

¥ Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated.

¥ Move the receiver away from the control/communicator.

¥ Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control/communicator.

¥ Plug the control/communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits.

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.

The user or installer may find the "Interference Handbook" booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission

helpful. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.

The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or

User's Manual. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC PART 68 NOTICE

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among

other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this

information must be provided to the telephone company.

This equipment uses the following jacks:

An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the

telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the

RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by

the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary

discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer

as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the

operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the

necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If the

trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the

network until the problem is resolved.

There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer.

Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.

This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to

state tariffs.

This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.

When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.

Perform such activities in the off-peak hours; such as early morning or late evening.

IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS

In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X (CA38A in

Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system. Do not

disconnect the phone connection inside the Control Panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular

phone works correctly after the Control Panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the Control Panel has a problem

and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of the Control Panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the

telephone company that they have a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances

(in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service

agency for all repairs.

Ð 105 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS

(DOC) STATEMENT

NOTICE

The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department

does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local

telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some

cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified

connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above

conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the

supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the

telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines

and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important

in rural areas.

Caution: User should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric

inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a

telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any

combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not

exceed 100.

AVIS

L'Žtiquette du minist•re des Communications du Canada identifie le matŽriel homologuŽ. Cette Žtiquette certifie que le

matŽriel est conforme ˆ certaines normes de protection, d'exploitation et de sŽcuritŽ des rŽseaux de

tŽlŽcommunications. Le minist•re n'assure toutefois pas que le matŽriel fonctionnera ˆ la satisfaction de l'utilisateur.

Avant d'installer ce matŽriel, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l'entreprise

locale de tŽlŽcommunications. Le matŽriel doit Žgalement •tre installŽ en suivant une mŽthode acceptŽe de

raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intŽrieurs de l'entreprise utilisŽs pour un service individuel ˆ la ligne unique

peuvent •tre prolongŽs au moyen d'un dispositif homologuŽ de raccordement (cordon prolongateur tŽlŽphonique interne).

L'abonnŽ ne doit pas oublier qu'il est possible que la conformitŽ aux conditions ŽnoncŽes ci-dessus n'emp•chet pas la

dŽgradation du service dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de tŽlŽcommunications ne permettent

pas que l'on raccorde leur matŽriel aux prises d'abonnŽs, sauf dans les cas precis prŽvus par les tarifs particuliers de

ces entreprises.

Les rŽparations du matŽriel homologuŽ doivent •tre effectuŽes pas un centre d'entretien canadien autorisŽ dŽsignŽ par le

fournisseur. La compagnie de tŽlŽcommunications peut demander ˆ l'utilisateur de dŽbrancher un appareil ˆ la suite de

rŽparations ou de modifications effectuŽes par l'utilisateur ou ˆ cause de mauvais fonctionnement.

Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d'Žnergie Žlectrique,

des lignes tŽlŽphoniques de rŽseau de conduites d'eau s'il y en a, soient raccordŽs ensemble. Cette prŽcaution est

particuli•rement importante dans les rŽgions rurales.

Avertissement: L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-m•me; il doit avoir recours ˆ un service

d'inspection des installations Žlectriques, ou ˆ un Žlectricien, selon le cas.

L'indice de charge (IC) assignŽ ˆ chaque dispositif terminal pour Žviter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la

charge totale qui peut •tre raccordŽ ˆ un circuit tŽlŽphonique bouclŽ utilisŽ par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit

bouclŽ peut •tre constituŽe de n'importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge

de l'ensemble des dispositifs ne dŽpasse pas 100.

Ð 106 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES

4192D/4192SDT/4192CP

SMOKE DETECTORS

4190WH ZONE EXPANDER

4208 ZONE EXPANDER

DIP

SIDE VIEW

SHOWN SET FOR

(UP)

ID 10 (A)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

APPLIES TO TABLE A & B UPLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 (A)

APPLIES TO TABLE A UPLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

POS.1: LOOPS 1 & 2

RESPONSE TIME:

W/TABLE

AST

SLOW

POS.1: MUST BE DOWN

WITH TABLE:

POS.1 MUST BE:

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP”

(“—” = OFF)

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN”

(“—” = OFF)

DIP SWITCH POSITION

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN”

(“—” = DN)

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

BIT

VALUE

—

10-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP”

(“—” = DN)

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

DIP SWITCH POSITION

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

DEVICE

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

10-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP UP

—

BIT

VALUE: 64 32 16

64 32 16

Ð 107 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPIPSWSWIT

TATA

ININ

ICIC

4278 PIR

4194 REED CONTACT

(SURFACE MOUNT)

4275 PIR

DIP

MIRROR

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10 (A)

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10

SIDE VIEW

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10

(

)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

(

DN)

—

POS 7: UP = NORMAL MODE

DN = INSTANT MODE

POS. 8: UP = W/T DISABLE

DN = WALK TEST

POS 6: UP (A), DN (B) = INST. MODE

DN (A), UP (B) = PULSE COUNT

POS. 7: UP (A), DN (B) = WALK TEST

DN (A), UP (B) = W/T DISABLE

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “OFF”

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

—

BIT

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “ON”

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

BIT

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

Up UP

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP

UP UP

—

UP UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP

—

UP UP UP UP UP UP

VALUE: 32 16

BIT

VALUE: 32 16

VALUE: 16

Ð 108 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIP SWITCH TABLES F OR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 SERIES WIRELESS DEVICES

5775 PIR

HOUSE ID

5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER

5706/5707 SMOKE

DETECTOR/TRANSMITTER

SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL

DEVICES EXCEPT 5716

DETECTORTRANSMITTER

DIP

MIRROR

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

DIP

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE

SIDE

VIEW (UP

)

—

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

SIDE

VIEW (UP

)

—

POS.6 UP= XMTR ID 62

DN= XMTR ID 63

—

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

SIDE

—

VIEW (UP

)

XMTR ID

(32 SHOWN)

—

5727 KEYPAD

UP = PULSE COUNT

— = INST. MODE

—

DIP SWITCH POSITION

XMTR

—

DIP

—

XMTR ID

(48 SHOWN)

—

DIP SWITCH POSITION

XMTR

—

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

XMTR ID

—

FIXED AT

“00”

—

SIDE

VIEW

—

BIT

VALUE:

—

(

)

5716 DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

IMPORTANT

SET SWITCHES WITH

BATTERY REMOVED

5711/5711WM

DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

5715

UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER

DIP SWITCH POSITION

TRANSMITTER

DIP

SW4

SW3

—

TERMINAL

BLOCK

TERMINALS

DIP

—

DIP

—

DIP

—

BIT

VALUE:

SW4

—

SIDE

VIEW (UP

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

—

)

—

SIDE

VIEW

10 11 12

—

XMTR ID (33 SHOWN)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

(

DN)

—

XMTR ID

(33 SHOWN)

SW3

POS.12: UP = N.O.

— = N.C

—

POS.1: UP = NORMAL RESPONSE

DN = FAST RESPONSE

POS. 2:UP = NO COVER TAMPER

—

(Avoid ID 32-37 with N.O.)

DN = COVER TAMPER (use N.C. setting)

—

POS. 6: UP = N.O.

DN = N.C.

—

DIP SWITCH POSITION

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

HOUSE

XMTR

—

—— UP

—

BIT

VALUE:

BIT

VALUE:

BIT

VALUE

For 5700 ser ies tr a n sm itter s n ot sh own in th is ta ble, r efer to th e in str u ction s a ccom pa n yin g ea ch tr a n sm itter .

Ð 109 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5. SPECIFICATIONS

VISTA-40 CONTROL

Physical: 12-1/2"W X 14-1/2"H X 3"D

Electrical:

VOLTAGE INPUT:

Ademco No. 1361 Plug-In Transformer (use 1361CN in Canada) or 4300

transformer (for X-10 installations) rated 16.5VAC, 40 VA.

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT: 10VDC-13.8VDC, 2.8 amps max., 750mA less aux. current draw

(UL1023/UL985 installations).

AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT: 9.6VDC-13.8VDC, 750mA max. For UL installations, the accessories

connected to the output must be UL Listed, and rated to operate in the above

voltage range.

BACK-UP BATTERY:

12VDC, 4AH or 7AH gel cell. YUASA NP4-12 (12V, 4AH) or NP7-12 (12V,

7AH) recommended.

STANDBY:

4 hours min. with 750 mA aux. load using 7 AH battery.

CIRCUIT PROTECTORS:

Thermal circuit breakers are used on battery input to protect against reverse

battery connections and on alarm sounder output to protect against wiring

faults (Shorts).

A solid state circuit breaker is used on auxiliary power output to protect against

wiring faults (shorts).

DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR

FORMATS SUPPORTED:

ADEMCO HIGH SPEED

ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS

ADEMCO LOW SPEED

ADEMCO CONTACT ID

SESCOA

RADIONICS LOW SPEED

LINE SEIZE: Double Pole

RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B

FCC REGISTRATION No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E

6 1 2 8

REMOTE KEYPAD

1. Physical: 5-3/4" W x 4-3/4" H x 1" D (146mm x 121mm x 26mm)

2. Electrical: Voltage Input: 12VDC; Current Drain: 30mA

3. Interface Wiring:

RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary power

BLUE: Not Used, if present

GREEN: Data to control panel

YELLOW: Data from control panel

BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from supplemental power supply.

6 1 3 7

REMOTE KEYPAD

1. Physical: 6-1/4" W x 4-3/4" H x 1" D (159mm x 121mm x 26mm)

2. Electrical: Voltage Input: 12VDC; Current Drain: 85mA

3. Interface Wiring: Same as 6128.

6 1 3 9

REMOTE KEYPAD

1. Physical: 6-1/4" W x 4-3/4" H x 1" D (159mm x 121mm x 26mm)

2. Electrical: Voltage Input: 12VDC; Current Drain: 100mA

3. Interface Wiring: Same as 6128.

6139AV

REMOTE KEYPAD

1. Physical: 6-1/4" W x 4-3/4" H x 1" D (159mm x 121mm x 26mm)

2. Electrical: Voltage Input: 12VDC; Current Drain: 200mA

3. Interface Wiring: See 2-WAY VOICE KEYPADS & AUDIO ALARM

VERIFICATION (AAV) section.

Ð 110 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT

PLEASE,

Before you call Technical Support, be sure you:

¥ READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!

¥ Check all wiring connections.

¥ Determine that the power supply and/or backup battery are supplying proper

voltages.

¥ Verify your programming information where applicable.

¥ Note the proper model number of this product, and the version level (if known)

along with any documentation that came with the product.

¥ Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or company name.

Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you quickly and effectively.

You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free FAX. Please include your return FAX number. You will

receive a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical Support via modem to ATLISÐBBS,

Technical Support's Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are posted within 24 hours.

East Coast Technical Support: 1Ð800Ð645Ð7492 (8 a.m.Ð6 p.m. E.S.T.)

West Coast Technical Support: 1Ð800Ð458Ð9469 (8 a.m.Ð5 p.m. P.S.T.)

Technical Support FAX Number: 1Ð800Ð447Ð5086

ATLISÐBBS Electronic Bulletin Board System: 1Ð516Ð496Ð3980

(1200 Ð 9600 Baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Start/Stop Bit, No Parity)

ATLIS FAX Ð Automated Fax Retrieval System: 1Ð800Ð573Ð0153

1Ð516Ð921Ð6704/Ext. 1667

ADEMCO World Wide Web Page: HTTP//:WWW.ADEMCO.COM

INTERNET E-Mail Address: Ademco_Tech_SPRT@AdemcoÐ165 .Ademco .com

Ð 111 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING!

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against

burglary, fire or other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to

compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons. For example:

¥ Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an

alarm sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device.

¥ Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will

not work without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the

batteries are not put in properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off

for any reason, however briefly.

¥ Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm

receiver. Even if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a

metal object is moved into the path.

¥ A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.

¥ While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they

may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to

data published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used

in conjunction with this System may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly

installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the

detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also

may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor detector, for example, may not

sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No smoke detector can

sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by

carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of

flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the

nature of the fire and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may

not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.

¥ Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their

installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create

multiple beams of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those

beams. They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors,

glass partitions, glass doors, or windows. Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any

material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive

Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the ambient temperature of the protected area

approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection performance can decrease.

¥ Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are

located on the other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of

the residence from the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even

persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air

conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic. Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not

warn hearing-impaired people.

¥ Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of

service or temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated

intruders.

¥ Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to

protect themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may

not respond appropriately.

¥ This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is

designed to last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.

The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate

maintenance. This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working

properly. The security keypad (and remote keypad) should be tested as well.

Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating

conditions. Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and

the specific wireless device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as

large swings in temperature, may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system,

however, can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain

protection for that given point within the system.

Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a

substitute for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in

protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and property.

We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and

their loved ones to learn about these developments.

Ð 112 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED

WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised

or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via cut

jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed operation.

Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8 may be selected

NOTES:

COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68

FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC398U-68192-AL-E

RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B

J7 Header

1. Not Used

2. Ground-

3. Out 1 (Ground Start)

4. Ground-

5. Out 2 (fire)

6. Ground-

7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic)

8. Ground

J8 Header

1. In 2

2. Ground

3. In 3 (4300 sync)

4. In 4 (4300 sync)

5. Ground

6. Out 5 (4300 data)

7. Out 6

8. Ground

MAKE CONNECTIONS USING

No. 4142TR CABLE

Optional programming:

Out 1: Open/close or Keypad-like sounding

Out 2: Armed LED

for either operation via program field *41.

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF

FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE

FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) IT MAY NOT

CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE.

Out 4: Ready LED

Ratings for Out 1:

Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.

See Installation Instructions for recommended type

and maximum number of detectors supported.

Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS

Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground

Ratings for out 2-4:

(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT

MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

3. Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch arming/disarming.

See Installation Instructions for wiring instructions.

Connect to

12VDC, 4AH

or 12VDC, 7AH

GEL CELL

BATTERY

TABS

Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS

Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground

9. Ground

9. Out 4 (silent panic/

duress)

Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.

See Installation Instructions for recommended type and

maximum number of detectors supported.

(Refer to Installation Instructions for information concerning Direct Wire

Downloading using the 4100SM Serial Module.)

Red Jumper

(note 1)

BATTERY

ZONE 8 ZONE 9

ZONE 2

ZONE 5

ZONE 6 ZONE 7

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

EARTH GROUND

Connect to good earth

ground to maintain im-

munity to transients.

See Instructions for

proper grounding.

CHARGING

VOLTAGE

13.7 VDC

See

ZONE 1

–

Installation

Instructions for

required

–

battery capacity

Handset

Incoming

Phone Line

Connect to

24-hr. 120VAC,

60 Hz Outlet

Replace

every

3 years

WARNING: TO PREVENT

RISK OF ELECTRICAL

SHOCK, DISCONNECT

TELCO JACK BEFORE

SERVICING THIS PANEL.

–

N.C.

Telephone connections

using Ademco

direct connect cord

and RJ31X jack

(CA38A in Canada)

Grn Yel

Red

Blk

REMOTE KEYPAD

(Addressable keypads)

N.O.

TRANSFORMER

16.5VAC, 40VA

ADEMCO No.1361

(IN CANADA

USE No. 1361CN)

or 4300 TRANS-

FORMER IF X-10

DEVICES

See Installation Instructions

for type & max # of keypads,

and for max wire run length.

DOC LOAD No.: 5

2k EOLR 2k EOLR

(note 1)

2k EOLR

(note 1)

2k EOLR

(note 1,3)

TO GND TERM 30

OPTIONAL

VOICE

INTERFACE

MODULE

(VIM)

(note 1)

6139AV

2-WAY

VOICE

KEYPADS

(UP TO 6)

–

TO:

TO HANDSET

TERMINAL'S 26 & 27

4190

RPM

–

NOTE:

GLASS

BREAK

–

Fire

Usage

OPTIONAL

4285 PHONE

MODULE

{

BELL

Zone 5 supports

AAV Triggering

(Zone Type 10)

See I.I. for Pro-

gramming and

Wiring Inform-

ation.

CONTROL'S

KEYPAD

TERMINALS

(6, 7, 8, 9)

WILL BE USED

N.C.

4192SD

SMOKE

NOTE:

SEE INSTRUCTIONS

FOR WIRING DETAILS

–

N.C.

WHEN POWERING UP

THE PANEL, PLUG THE

TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE

CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL TO A FIRE

ALARM HEADQUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION SHALL

BE PERMITED ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE BURGLAR ALARM

SIGNAL SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POLICE

EMERGENCY NUMBER.

N.O.

OPTIONAL

4281/5881/5882

RF RECEIVER

N.C.

4278

PIR

N.O.

Burg.

Usage

SIREN

2k EOLR

(note 1)

2k EOLR

(note 1)

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT

10VDC-13.8 VDC,2.8A max.

Note: Combined alarm and auxilary

power output current must be limited

to 750mA for UL installations.

SEE INSTRUCTIONS

FOR WIRING DETAILS

2k EOLR

(note 1,4)

N.O.

+ –

Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):

ZONE 1, 8: 100 OHMS MAX.

ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAX.

USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS

AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT

9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,750 mA max.

Note: Include current drawn

by keypads and polling loop

devices when making

Polling loop rating: 64mA

maximum. See Installa-

tion Instructions for

2k EOLR

(note 1,2)

THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE

WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S

STANDARD 74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,

BATTERYMARCH PARK.QUINCY, MA. 02269). PRINTED

INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER INSTALLATION,

OPERATION, TESTING, MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION

PLANNING AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH

THIS EQUIPMENT.

Zone response time:

maximum number of

ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec, or 720mSec

ZONE 9: Programmable for

Fast: 10mSec-15mSec

Normal: 350mSec-500mSec, or 720mSec

(default response)

FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION,

SEE INSTRUCTIONS N7001-INSTV2

ALL CIRCUITS ARE

devices supported and

maximum wire run length.

auxiliary power calculations.

POWER LIMITED.

VISTA-40 SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions,

subsidiaries and affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its

products to be in conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects

in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 18 months from the date stamp

control on the product or, for products not having an Ademco date stamp, for 12 months from

date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter

period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's obligation shall be limited to

repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product which is

proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or

workmanship under normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited

Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone

other than Ademco factory service. For warranty service, return product transportation prepaid,

to Ademco Factory Service, 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE

DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO

ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS

OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF

LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S

OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.

Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented;

that the products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or

otherwise; or that the products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection.

Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of

a burglary, robbery, fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not

insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or

property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY

PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE

PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE, WHETHER

DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED

WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM

LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT,

WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This

warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this

product. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is

authorized.

ALARM DEVICE MANUFACTURING CO.

A DIVISION OF PITTWAY CORPORATION

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

N7001ÐINSTV2 6/97 Part of N7001V2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N5944-6ZZ

ADDENDUM TO: VISTA-40 and VISTA 50P/UL Installation Instructions

6/97

NEW "QED" DEVICE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE FOR 5800 SERIES

TRANSMITTERS AND SERIAL NUMBER POLLING LOOP DEVICES

This addendum describes the new procedure for "enrolling" 5800 series transmitters or serial number

polling-loop devices into the system. There are two methods of enrolling:

•

Enrolling Through Zone Programming

Enrolling Through Sequential Mode

The Enrolling Through Zone Programming procedure describes how to enroll each wireless transmitter or

serial number polling-loop devices into the system as you are entering the zone information. The

Enrolling Through Sequential Mode procedure describes how to enroll all the wireless transmitters and/or

polling-loop devices into the system after all zone information has been entered. Use these procedures

in place of the procedures described in the Installation Instructions.

As an option, the new enroll modes allow you to use a 5803 or 5804 button-type transmitter as a

"program tool." The program tool:

•

is used for enrolling 5800 series RF wireless or serial number polling loop devices

duplicates the ✱ and # key programming functions (left program tool button = ✱, right = #). You can

move to the physical location of the transmitter to be enrolled, press the upper left-hand button of the

program tool, and then trip the intended transmitter.

•

can also be used as a transmitter in the system. If you plan to use an existing transmitter, it must first

be enrolled into the system as its associated zones. You may then program it as the tool.

An alpha keypad is required for the following procedures.

ENROLLING THROUGH ZONE PROGRAMMING (#93)

1. Enter Programming mode [Installer Code] + 8 + 0 + 0. Enter Zone

Programming by pressing #93. If the system has been set up to use

5800 series RF, and a program tool has already been entered, skip to

step 4. If no program tool has been entered, the following prompt will

appear:

2. If a program tool is being used, enter "1." If not using a tool, enter "0" and

skip to Step 4.

PROGRAM TOOL?

0 = NO, 1 = YES

3. If "1" is entered, the system will prompt for the unit’s serial number. Enter

the program tool’s serial number using one of the following methods:

10 INPUT S/N: L

Axxx-xxxx

a) Enter the 7 digit serial number for the transmitter

b) Press any button on the transmitter. The keypad should beep three

times and display the serial number of the tool.

In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once enrolled, the

upper left-hand button of the program tool can be pressed to ready the

system for enrolling a transmitter into the system. Pressing the # key on

the keypad will cause the system to back up to the “PROGRAM TOOL ? “

prompt.

10 PROG AS BR: 3

A123-4567

The serial number for the program tool will only remain in

the system until the programming mode is exited.

(Entering ✱97 will not delete the tool.)

Press [✱] to continue.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Enter the zone number that you wish to program. As an example, zone

ENTER ZN NO.

00 = QUIT

10 is shown here. Press [✱] to continue.

↑

Zone 10 entered

5. A display will appear, showing a summary of that zone's programming. If

the zone is not programmed, the display will appear as shown here. If

checking a zone's programming, and it is programmed satisfactorily, press

[#] to back up one step and enter another zone number, if desired.

Otherwise, press [✱] to continue.

10 ZT P RC IN:L

00 – –– ––: –

↓ Zone Number

6. Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines the way in which

the system responds to faults in that zone. Enter the zone type desired

(or change it, if necessary). Available zone types are listed below.

10 ZONE TYPE

Perimeter

Entry for Zone Type 03

shown

00 = Assign For Unused Zones

01 = Entry/Exit #1, Burglary

02 = Entry/Exit #2, Burglary

03 = Perimeter, Burglary

04 = Interior Follower, Burglary

05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night

06 = 24 Hr Silent

08 = 24 Hr Aux

09 = Fire

10 = Interior Delay, Burglary

20 = Arm–Stay*

21 = Arm Away*

22 = Disarm*

23 = No Alarm Response

(EX: Relay activation)

07 = 24 Hr Audible

These are special zone of types used with 5800 series wireless push-button

units which will result in arming the system in the STAY or AWAY mode, or

disarming of the system, depending on the selection made.

Press [✱] to continue.

7. Enter the partition number you are assigning this zone to.

10 PARTITION

Press [✱] to continue.

8. Enter the report code. The report code consists of 2 hexadecimal digits,

each in turn consisting of 2 numerical digits. For example, for a report

code of "3C", enter [0][3] for "3" and [1][2] for "C."

10 REPORT CODE

1st 03 2nd 12 3C

(Refer to System Communication section in the applicable Installation

Instructions for more information about report codes and report code

formats.)

Press [✱] to continue.

9. Enter the RF transmitter or serial number polling loop input device type as

follows:

10 INPUT TYPE

RF Xmitter

3 = RF (supervised RF transmitter)

4 = UR (unsupervised RF transmitter)

5 = BR (button type RF transmitter - unsupervised)

6 = SL (serial polling device)

(Refer to the Installation Instructions for more information about input

types.)

Press [✱] to continue.

Ð 2 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. The cursor should now be flashing on the loop number. The default is

"1." To accept this, press [✱]. If a different loop number is being used on

this device, enter the loop number (1-4) and press [✱] to continue (see

the loop designations for various RF transmitters on page 8 of this

addendum). The loop number must be entered here, whether

using Zone Programming or Sequential Mode to "enroll"

serial numbers. If you want to delete the serial number, enter "0" and

press [✱]. The system will then prompt, "DELETE S/N?" Press the "1"

(YES) key to complete the delete sequence. This process deletes the

serial number only, not the loop number. The assumption is that the

proper loop number was programmed, but the wrong serial number was

enrolled.

10 LOOP #

11. If the device’s serial number has not been previously “enrolled,” you may

enter the enrollment mode now by either entering "1" (YES) or by

pressing the upper left-hand button of the program tool. If using the

program tool, move to the physical location of the device to

be enrolled before pressing the button. A single short beep will

verify that the button has been pressed. The system will respond to the

first serial number transmitted after the [1] key on the keypad or the

button of the program tool is pressed. Enter "0" (NO) to enroll later. (If

"0" is entered, go to step 14.)

10 LEARN S/N?

1 = YES, 0 = NO

12. This prompt is displayed if "1" (YES) is entered in response to the "Learn

S/N?" prompt. The serial number may be enrolled by one of two

methods:

10 INPUT S/N

Axxx-xxxx

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the transmitter using an alpha

keypad

b) Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input you wish to use

for that zone (e.g., press a button, open or close a door, etc.).

The system will enroll the serial number of the first device heard.

10 INPUT S/N

A022-4064

If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system,

the keypad will sound a single long beep and display the word "DUPLICATE"

along with the serial number, and the number of the zone containing the

serial/loop number combination.

13. The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the

operation of the actual programmed input can be confirmed. Activate the

loop input or button that corresponds to this zone. We recommend

that you confirm the programming of every device before

proceeding to the next zone.

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will beep three

times and display the confirmation message.

10 CONFIRM RF:1

A022-4064

Ð 3 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

At any time during this step, you may press the [✱] key on the keypad or the

upper left-hand button of the program tool if you are satisfied with the serial

and loop number combination that has been enrolled, regardless of whether

or not the enrolled input has been "confirmed."

If the incorrect device has been enrolled, press the # key on the keypad or

upper right-hand button on the program tool to delete the serial number and

return to the "LEARN S/N" prompt. A single long beep will be heard from the

keypad to verify pressing of the upper right-hand button. Then, press "1"

(Yes) or press the upper left-hand button of the program tool (a single short

beep will verify the system is ready for enrolling) and re-activate the proper

device loop input.

14. The summary screen for the zone will appear. Note that an "s" indicates

that a serial number has, in fact, been enrolled. Press [✱] to accept the

zone information.

10 ZT P RC IN:L

s 03 1 00 RF:1

If you want to delete the serial number, press [#]. This will bring you back

to step 8. Press [✱] to change input type, loop number, and serial

number.

When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's

TEST mode. Do not use the Transmitter ID Sniffer mode for this, as it will only

check for transmission of one zone on a particular transmitter, NOT the zones

assigned to each additional loop, and will not verify polling loop type zones.

ENROLLING THROUGH SEQUENTIAL MODE (#93)

(Use this mode only after all other zone information has been programmed, including

transmitter loop numbers).

To enroll devices sequentially, after all other zone information has been

programmed, do the following:

1. Enter Programming mode [Installer Code] + 8 + 0 + 0 on an alpha

keypad. Enter Sequential mode by pressing #93. Press 0 repeatedly

until the "SEQUENTIAL LEARN" prompt is displayed. Enter "1" to enroll

a device's serial number. The following prompt will appear:

2. If using a program tool, enter "1." If not using a tool, enter "0." If a tool

PROGRAM TOOL?

has already been programmed, this prompt will not appear. If either not

using a tool or one has already been programmed, skip to step 4.

0 = NO, 1 = YES

3. If "1" is entered, the system will prompt for the unit’s serial number. Enter

the program tool’s serial number using one of the following methods:

00 INPUT S/N: L

Axxx-xxxx

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the transmitter

b) Press any button on the transmitter. The keypad should beep three

times and display the serial number of the tool.

Ð 4 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once enrolled, the

upper left-hand button of the program tool can be pressed to ready the

system for enrolling a transmitter into the system.

00 PROG AS BR:3

A123-4567

The serial number for the program tool will only remain in

the system until the programming mode is exited.

(Entering ✱97 will not delete the tool.)

Press [✱] to continue.

Pressing the # key on the keypad will cause the system to back up to the

"PROGRAM TOOL ?" prompt.

4. Enter the type of device(s) to be enrolled as follows:

TECHNOLOGY TYPE

WIRELESS

0 = Wireless (Default)

1 = Polling Loop

2 = Both

Default ↑

Press [✱] to continue.

5. Enter the first zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 10).

ENTER ZN NO.

(00 = QUIT)

Press [✱] to continue.

Zone Number Entered ↑

The system will, starting with this zone number, search for the first device

which has all of the following attributes pre-programmed in Zone

Programming:

a) An input type of RF, UR, BR, or SL (if serial polling loop

devices enabled) programmed

b) A loop number programmed

c) No serial number programmed

If the first zone number entered does not have one or more of the above

attributes, the system will search its database for the first zone that does and

will display it on the next screen.

6. This prompt is displayed when the system has found the next zone which

needs to be enrolled. The system will respond to the first serial number

transmitted after the [✱] key on the keypad or the button of the program

tool is pressed. A single short beep will verify that the button has been

pressed. A serial number may be enrolled by one of two methods:

10 INPUT S/N

Axxx xxxx

a) Enter the 7 digit serial number printed on the device.

b) Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input you wish to use for

that zone (e.g., press a button, open or close a door, etc.).

Ð 5 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you do not wish to enroll the zone displayed, press the # key on the

keypad or the upper right-hand button on the program tool (a long beep will

be heard to verify). The following prompt will appear:

10 LEARN S/N?

0 = NO, 1 = YES

To enroll now, enter "1" (YES). If "0" (NO) is entered, the following prompt

will appear :

ENTER ZN NUM.

(00 = QUIT) 12

Zone Number Entered ↑

Enter the next zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 12). The system will

search for that zone and will display the prompt shown in the beginning of

step 5. If you wish to exit the enrollment mode completely, enter 00 and

press [✱].

The system will enroll the first serial number heard, display the serial

numbers, and cause the keypad to beep twice.

10 INPUT S/N

A 022-4064

↑

Serial #

If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system,

the keypad will sound a single long beep and display the word "DUPLICATE"

along with the serial number, and the number of the zone containing the

serial/loop number combination.

7. The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the

operation of the actual programmed input can be confirmed. Activate the

loop input or button that corresponds to this zone. We recommend

that you confirm the programming of every device before

proceeding to the next zone.

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will beep three

times and display the confirmation message. Press [✱] or the upper left-

hand button of the program tool when you are ready to enroll the next

serial number device.

10 CONFIRMED SL:1

A022-4064

At any time during this step, you may press the [✱] key on the keypad or the

upper left-hand button of the program tool if you are satisfied with the serial

and loop number combination that has been enrolled, regardless of whether

or not the enrolled input has been "confirmed." This will ready the system to

enroll the next serial number device.

If the incorrect device has been enrolled, press the # key on the keypad or

the upper right-hand button of the program tool to delete the serial number

and return to the "LEARN S/N" prompt. A single long beep will be heard from

the keypad to verify pressing of the upper right-hand button. Then, press "1"

(Yes) or press the upper left-hand button of the program tool (a single short

beep will verify the system is ready for enrolling) and re-activate the proper

device or device loop input.

Ð 6 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. The system will search for the next zone that does not have a serial

number associated with it. If one is found, the prompt in step 5, along

with the appropriate zone number, will be displayed. Follow steps 5 and

6 for the remaining zones.

After all zones have been displayed, whether enrolled or not, the "ENTER ZN

NO." prompt will appear. Enter "00" to exit the Sequential mode and return

to data field programming mode.

When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's

TEST mode. Do not use the Transmitter ID Sniffer mode for this, as it will only

check for transmission of one zone on a particular transmitter, NOT the zones

assigned to each additional loop, and will NOT verify polling loop type.

RF SERIAL NUMBER CLEAR MODE (#93)

This mode may be used in the event that an undesired transmitter has been enrolled during sequential

enrolling, causing each subsequent serial number to be assigned to an incorrect zone. Performing this

operation will delete all RF serial numbers, leaving all other zone information intact. You may then return to

Sequential mode to re-enroll wireless transmitters.

The RF Serial Number Clear mode will not delete polling loop serial numbers.

To clear all RF wireless serial numbers, do the following:

1. Enter Programming mode [Installer Code] + 8 + 0 + 0 on an alpha

keypad. Enter RF Serial Number Clear mode by pressing #93. Press 0

repeatedly until the "CLEAR RF SERIAL #?" prompt is displayed as

follows:

2. Enter "1" to clear all RF wireless serial numbers. The "ARE YOU SURE?"

CLEAR RF SERIAL#?

prompt is displayed as follows:

1 = YES, 0 = NO

3. Enter "1" to clear all RF serial numbers. Re-enter the Sequential mode to

enroll wireless transmitters.

ARE YOU SURE?

1 = YES, 0 = NO

Ð 7 Ð

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5800 Series Transmitter Input Loop Identification

• All of the transmitters illustrated below have one or more unique factory assigned input (loop) ID codes. Each

of the inputs requires its own programming zone (e.g., a 5803's three inputs require three programming

zones).

• Transmitter inputs entered as:

"RF" (Supervised RF) Type send periodic check-in signals, as well as fault, restore and low

battery signals. The transmitter must remain within the receiver's range.

“UR" (Unsupervised RF) Type send all the signals that the "RF" Type does, but the control does

not supervise the check-in signals. The transmitter may, therefore, be carried off-premises.

"BR" (Unsupervised Button RF) Type only send fault signals. They do not send restore, check-

in, or automatic low battery signals. The transmitter may be carried off-premises.

INPUT

(LOOP)

INPUT

(LOOP)

(REED)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

INPUT

(LOOP)

ALTERNATE

POSITION

FOR LOOP2

5816

LEARN AS "RF"

5816MN

LEARN AS "RF"

(ALWAYS USE)

5802/5802CP

LEARN AS "BR"

5801

LEARN AS "UR" OR "RF"

INPUT

(LOOP)

(PRIMARY)

INPUT

(LOOP)

INPUT

(LOOP)

(AUX. CENTER)

5818

LEARN AS "RF"

(AUX. RIGHT)

INPUT

(LOOP)

5817

LEARN AS "RF"

5802MN

LEARN AS "UR" OR "RF"

5803

LEARN AS "BR"

INPUT

5827

SET HOUSE CODE

(LOOP)

(REED)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

5827BD

SET HOUSE CODE

LOOP 3

YOU MUST

LEARN THIS

BUTTON

LOOP 4

5819

LEARN AS "RF"

OFF

LOOP 2

LOOP 1

LOOP 3

(TERMINALS)

INPUT

(LOOP)

5806/5807/5808

(5806 SHOWN)

LEARN AS "RF"

INPUT

(LOOP)

INPUT

(LOOP)

5804

LEARN

AS "BR"

(MOTION)

5849

5890

LEARN AS "RF"

ALARM DEVICE MANUFACTURING CO.

A DIVISION OF PITTWAY CORPORATION

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graco Baby Swing 2560 User Manual
Greenway Home Products Ice Maker PIM9W User Manual
Grundig Food Processor UM 8050 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Coffeemaker 42471 User Manual
Hasselblad Camera Lens 0 5 User Manual
Hasselblad Camera Lens CFi 35 30 User Manual
Healthrider Treadmill HRTL14911 User Manual
Hotpoint Washer AQ1138D 697 S User Manual
IBM DVR DM 10 User Manual
Impex Home Gym SB 685 User Manual